Home

Netopia 3300-ENT User's Manual

Contents

1. In addition to being a gateway the Router is also an IP address server There are three protocols it can use to distribute IP addresses The first called Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is widely supported on PC networks as well as Apple Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system Addresses assigned via DHCP are leased or allocated for a short period of time if a lease is not renewed the address becomes available for use by another computer DHCP also allows most of the IP parameters for a computer to be configured by the DHCP server simplifying setup of each machine The second called BootP also known as Bootstrap Protocol is the predecessor to DHCP and allows older IP hosts to obtain most of the information that a DHCP client would obtain However in contrast BootP address assignments are permanent since there is no lease renewal mechanism in BootP The third protocol called Dynamic WAN is part of the PPP MP suite of wide area protocols used for WAN connections It allows remote terminal adapters and NAT enabled gateways to be assigned a temporary IP address for the duration of their connection Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time make sure that the addresses distributed by the Router and those that are manually configured are not the same Each method of distribution must have its own exclusive range of addresses to draw
2. Line Backup 7 15 The Backup Configuration screen appears Backup Configuration Backup Parameters Backup is Disabled Requires Failure of minutes Manual Ping Host Name or IP Address Automatic Recovery to ADSL Automatic Requires Recovery of minutes 1 Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 No Automatically switches to Backup Port on loss of Layer 1 or 2 This screen is used to configure the conditions under which backup will occur if it will recover and how the alternate gateway is configured Select Backup is and press Return A pop up menu allows you to select Disabled Manual or Automatic You enable backup by selecting either Manual or Automatic If you enable backup the subsequent menu items become visible Select Requires Data Link Failure of minutes Enter the number of minutes you want the system to wait before the backup port becomes enabled in the event of primary line failure This allows you to be sure the WAN connection is not merely briefly interrupted before the gateway switches to backup mode Select Ping Host Name or IP Address and enter an IP address or resolvable DNS name that the gateway will ping This is an optional item that is particularly useful for testing if the remote end of a VPN connection has gone down Should this address become unreachable the gateway will treat this as a loss of connectivity and begin the backup timer This loss is a Layer 2 loss Note For best results
3. This incoming IP packet 10000000 has a source IP address that does not match the network address in the Source IP Address field 00000000 in the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 This rule will forward this packet because the packet does not match Example 3 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 240 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 184 200 1 1 184 10111000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 240 11110000 Perform the logical AND Security 9 41 10110000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Router is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 1011000 this rule does not match and this packet will be forwarded Example 4 Filter Rule 200 1 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 240 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 104 200 1 1 104 01101000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 240 11110000 Perform the logical AND 01100000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Router is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 01100000 this rule does match and this packet will not be forwarded Example 5 Filter Rule 200 1
4. Main Add Display Change Menu WAN Configuration Connection Profile IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set Multicast Forwarding RIP Profile Options Typically you will have a Connection Profile that you created in Easy Setup You may have more Select the Connection Profile that you want to use from the Display Change Connection Profile menu and then select IP Profile Parameters By default Multicast Forwarding is turned off None on Connection Profiles until you enable a specific Connection Profile to receive multicast data You enable it by selecting Rx from the pull down menu Line Backup 7 1 Chapter 7 Line Backup Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers line backup functionality in the event of a line failure on the primary WAN link e to an internal V 92 modem Supported models or e to a backup default gateway This chapter covers the following topics i Configuring Backup on page 7 1 ti Connection Profiles on page 7 2 ti WAN Configuration on page 7 8 ti Using Scheduled Connections with Backup on page 7 12 ti Backup Default Gateway on page 7 14 Backup Management Statistics
5. cccccccceceseveseueueeeeeueeseeeneneneeaees 4 15 Contents v ATMP contig UFauON ccsssiecstuxmassicensdusassesmersentnasacenes 4 15 Enerypuion SUPON neriie 4 17 MS CHAP V2 and 128 bit strong encryption 4 18 ATIMP PPTP Default Profile sisepinna 4 18 MPN QUICK VIGW ssiscecsnsccuandcptenctasetaknnadaanectaanonemeredannoananons 4 20 Dial Up Networking Tor VPN vsccsscicsdesessiencescdoheestenausacceates 4 21 Installing Dial Up Networking cccsseseseeeneeeees 4 21 Creating a new Dial Up Networking profile 4 22 Configuring a Dial Up Networking profile 4 23 Connecting using Dial Up Networking 006 4 24 Allowing VPNs through a Firewall sccsscsseeeeneeeeeneenees 4 24 PPTP EXAMP Oera E EE 4 26 ATMP ERAMO eeir E RE 4 28 Windows Networking Broadcasts sccsscsseeeeneeeeeneenees 4 31 Chapter 5 Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNS 2 c0sscesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 OVOIMIOW scsiisccisuins eve nsats dovgeaveaul na aa a 5 1 Internet Key Exchange IKE Configuration c ceccseenee 5 2 Adding an IKE Phase 1 Profile scsseseeeeeees 5 4 Changing an IKE Phase 1 Profile scesceeees 5 7 Key Mamas eMment lt isecssceuctcssccanatveawnntsnitecesctasesatsneetinecvaces 5 8 Advanced IPSEC Options sscsssssseeseseseeeneeees 5 11 IPsec WAN Configuration Screens cscesceseseeeeeeerenees 5 18 IPsec Mantal K
6. Filter Sets on page 2 23 Security on page 2 36 Network Address Translation NAT on page 2 23 Upgrade Feature Set on page 2 36 ki Stateful Inspection on page 2 23 Change Device to a Bridge on page 2 37 Date and time on page 2 29 Logging on page 2 38 i Wireless configuration on page 2 30 To access the system configuration screens select System Configuration in the Main Menu then press Return The System Configuration menu screen appears System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Stateful Inspection Date and Time Wireless Configuration Console Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Bridge Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup WAN and System Configuration 2 23 IP Setup These screens allow you to configure your network s use of the IP networking protocol e Details are given in IP Setup on page 6 2 Filter Sets These screens allow you to configure security on your network by means of filter sets and a basic firewall e Details are given in Security on page 9 1 IP Address Serving These screens allow you to configure IP address serving on your network by means of DHCP WANIP and BootP e Details are
7. For Router C a b c 248 255 255 255 248 3 The Router s connection profiles for Routers B and C create entries in its IP routing table One entry points to the subnet a b c 128 while a second entry points to the subnet a b c 248 The IP routing table might look similar to the following Understanding IP Addressing B 13 IP Routing Table 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 Loopback 255 255 255 192 a b c 128 WAN a b c 248 255 255 255 248 a b c 248 WAN UPDATE Let s see how a packet from the Internet gets routed to the host with IP address a b c 249 which is served by Router C The packet first arrives at Router A which delivers it to its local network a b c 0 The packet is then received by the Router which examines its destination IP address The Router compares the packet s destination IP address with the routes in its IP routing table It begins with the route at the bottom of the list and works up until there s a match or the route to the default gateway is reached When a b c 249 is masked by the first route s subnet mask it yields a b c 248 which matches the network address in the route The Router uses the connection profile associated with the route to connect to Router C and then forwards the packet Router C delivers the packet to the host on its local network B 14 Firmware User Guide The following diagram illustrates the IP address space taken up by the two remote IP subnets You can see from the diagram
8. SS ee E Receive RIP Off vl Transmit RIP v2 Both E The Receive RIP pop up menu controls the reception and transmission of Routing Information Protocol RIP packets on the Ethernet WAN port The default is Both The Transmit RIP pop up menu is hidden if NAT is enabled Routing Information Protocol RIP is needed if there are IP routers on other segments of your Ethernet network that the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 needs to recognize Set to Both the default the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will accept information from either RIP v1 or v2 routers Alternatively select Receive RIP and select v1 or v2 from the popup menu With Receive RIP set to vi the Netopia Router s Ethernet port will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use the same subnet mask Set to v2 the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use different subnet masks 2 4 Firmware User Guide If you want the Netopia Router to advertise its routing table to other routers via RIP select Transmit RIP and select v1 v2 broadcast or v2 multicast from the popup menu With Transmit RIP v1 selected the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will generate RIP packets only to other RIP v1 routers With Transmit RIP v2 broadcast selected the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will generate RIP packets to all other hosts on the network With Transmit RIP
9. Understanding IP Addressing B 11 Nested IP Subnets Under certain circumstances you may want to create remote subnets from the limited number of IP addresses issued by your ISP or other authority You can do this using connection profiles These subnets can be nested within the range of IP addresses available to your network For example suppose that you obtain the Class C network address a b c 0 to be distributed among three networks This network address can be used on your main network while portions of it can be subnetted to the two remaining networks Note The IP address a b c 0 has letters in place of the first three numbers to generalize it for this example The figure shows a possible network configuration following this scheme The main network is set up with the Class C address a b c 0 and contains Router A which could be a Router a Router and a number of other hosts Router A maintains a link to the Internet and can be used as the default gateway B 12 Firmware User Guide Internet Bag a b c 128 a b c 129 O l al a b c 248 a b c 249 if UH J E c Routers B and C which could also be Routers serve the two remote networks that are subnets of a b c 0 The subnetting is accomplished by configuring the Router with connection profiles for Routers B and C see the following table For Router B a b c 128 255 255 255 192 7
10. c0sesseeseeseeeeeseneeeees C 1 Appendix D Technical Specifications and Safety Information D 1 DESC MUON sit orciceitcarienssentcacaste n E EE D 4 Power requirements cccceccececcececsececeeceseeseees D 4 EMVINOMMIGING sunne a D 1 Software and protocols cccceceececeeceseeseeeeseees D 4 ASCHCY AP PNOVAl S renser pnan e EDER seus D 2 NOnMAMGIC Sanies enoi o a aa cer eer pr D 2 Wernane ere er rte D 2 Manufacturer s Declaration of Conformance 0es0ee D 3 Important Safety INStrUCtiONS ssisssurisiiisieesinseririsesinssss D 4 FCG Part 6S Informal OMaria ar e sceeecasses D 5 FCC REQUINGIMGNNS ses coe lt 2 ccs cacuicncenssscneacterinenenseeteaed D 5 FCG Statements saccsssscateacenaadecnseyacancascncatepsnercesnass D 5 Electrical Safety AGVISOlY 2 55 s22ccd205 cedsesndecsnes aeaa D 7 Index Firmware User Guide Introduction 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction This Firmware User Guide covers the advanced features of the Netopia 3300 Series Router family Your Netopia equipment offers advanced configuration features accessed through the Main Menu of the Telnet configuration screen This Firmware User Guide documents the advanced features including advanced testing security monitoring and configuration This Firmware User Guide should be used as a companion to the Quickstart Guide and the Getting Started Guide You should read the Quickstart Guide and the Getting Started Guide before reading this F
11. Not Equal To Matches any port other than what is defined Less Than Anything less than the port defined Security 9 39 Less Than or Equal Any port less than or equal to the port defined Equal Matches only the port defined Greater Than or Equal Matches the port or any port greater Greater Than Matches anything greater than the port defined Example network meann Input Packet Filter IP 200 1 1 Data Example filters Example 1 Filter Rule 200 1 1 0 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 128 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 28 200 1 1 28 00011100 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 128 10000000 Perform the logical AND 9 40 Firmware User Guide 00000000 Logical AND result This incoming IP packet has a source IP address that matches the network address in the Source IP Address field 00000000 in the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 This will not forward this packet Example 2 Filter Rule 200 1 1 0 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 128 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 184 200 1 1 184 10111000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 128 10000000 Perform the logical AND 10000000 Logical AND result
12. Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 9 When you define a Connection Profile as using L2TP by selecting L2TP as the datalink encapsulation method and then select Encapsulation Options the L2TP Tunnel Options screen appears L2TP Tunnel Options L2TP Partner IP Address 0 0 0 0 L2TP Tunnel Authentication No PPP Authentication PAP Data Compression Standard LZS Send Host Name Send Password Receive Host Name Receive Password Initiate Connections On Demand Idle Timeout seconds Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX e Enter the L2TP Partner IP Address This specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel If you do not specify the L2TP Partner IP Address the Router cannot initiate tunnels e If you specify the L2TP Partner IP Address and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote IP Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters the Tunnel Via Gateway option becomes visible You can enter the address by which the Router partner is reached If you do not specify the L2TP Partner IP Address the Router will use the default gateway to reach the partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidden If the partner should be reached via an alternate port i e the LAN instead of the WAN the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this path to be resolved Toggle L2TP
13. Quick Menus Quick Menus Quick View Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration You always start from this main screen You always start from this main screen Based on access level the Main Menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram User Access Level Bee moises Superuser Easy Setup WAN Conn Profiles PVC WAN Configuration All System Configuration All Utilities amp Diagnostics Global Voice Statistics amp Logs All Quick Menus All Quick View Return Enter goes to Easy Setup minimal configuration You always start from this main screen WAN Configuration screens Security 9 11 If a limited user is allowed WAN Connection Profile or PVC configuration access the WAN Configuration option in the Main Menu is visible If a limited user selects WAN Configuration in the Main Menu the WAN Configuration screen displays its configuration options according to the following diagram WAN WAN Configuration PVC WAN Wide Area Network Setup Connection Profiles ATM Circuits Configuration Display Change Connection Profile Connection Profiles Add Connection Profile Connection Profiles Connection Profiles Delete Connection Profile WAN Default Profile ATMP PPTP Default Profile Connec
14. Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit This allows you to select an exposed address list for editing or deletion WAN and System Configuration 2 29 Date and time You can set the system s date and time parameters in the Set Date and Time screen Select Date and Time in the System Configuration screen and press Return The Set Date and Time screen appears Set Date and Time NTP Network Time Prot Enabled On Time Server Host Name IP Address 204 152 184 72 Time Zone GMT 8 00 Pacific Standard Time NTP Update Interval HHHH MM 0 00 System Date Format MM DD YY System Time Format AM PM Follow these steps to set the system s date and time 1 Toggle NTP Network Time Prot Enabled to On to synchronize the Router s time and date with a network server Toggle this field to Off to manually set the time and date the options in this screen will change to allow you to manually enter the time and date parameters Note If time and date are manually set that information will be lost upon reboot or loss of power Enter the IP address of the time server in the field Time Server Host Name IP Address Select the Router s time zone from the Time Zone pop up menu and press Return In the NTP Update Interval field enter how often to synchronize with the time server using the format HHHH MM where H is hours and M is minutes 5 Select a System Date Format the options are MM DD YY DD MM
15. for the equipment RJ11 c A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details d The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2002 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g O3 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label e If this equipment the Netopia 3300 Series router causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to f
16. n With Receive RIP set to v1 the Ethernet port will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use the same subnet mask Set to v2 the router will accept routing informa tion provided by RIP packets from other routers that use different subnet masks Set to Both the router will accept information from either RIP v1 or v2 routers n With Transmit RIP v1 selected the router will generate RIP packets only to other RIP v1 routers With Transmit RIP v2 broadcast selected the router will generate RIP packets to all other hosts on the net work With Transmit RIP v2 multicast selected the router will generate RIP packets only to other rout ers capable of recognizing RIP v2 packets If you want to enable Multicast Forwarding select Multicast Forwarding and from the pop up menu choose the type that you want to enable See Multicast Forwarding on page 6 33 for detailed configuration If you enable Multicast Forwarding the next field IGMP Version appears You can choose v1 or v2 from the pop up menu Select Static Routes to manually configure IP routes See the section Static routes below If you select IP Address Serving you will be taken to the IP Address Serving screen see IP Address Serving on page 6 17 Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time make sure 6 4 Firmware User Guide that the addresses distributed by the Router and those that are manually configure
17. 253 192 129 117 110 192 129 117 4 This screen consists of between two and eight rows of four columns each There are exactly as many rows as there are Ethernet IP subnets configured on the IP Subnets screen The Subnet host addrs column is non selectable and non editable It indicates the network address of the Ethernet IP subnet for which an address pool is being configured and the number of host addresses available on the subnet The network address is equal to the gateway s IP address on the subnet bitwise ANDed with the subnet mask The host address count is equal to the subnet size minus three since one address is reserved for the network address one for the subnet broadcast address and one for the gateway s interface address on the subnet You can edit the remaining columns in each row The 1st Client Addr and Clients columns allow you to specify the base and extent of the address serving pool for a particular subnet Entering 0 0 0 0 for the first client address or O for the number of clients indicates that no addresses will be served from the corresponding Ethernet IP subnet The Client Gateway column allows you to specify the default gateway address that will be provided to clients served an address from the corresponding pool The value defaults to the Router s IP address on the corresponding subnet or the Router s default gateway if that gateway is located on the subnet in question You can override the value by ent
18. Configuration gt Connection Options Connections 2 16 Firmware User Guide Scheduled Connections Display Change Scheduled Connection Add Scheduled Connection Delete Scheduled Connection Navigate from here to add modify change delete Scheduled Connections Viewing scheduled connections To display a table of scheduled connections select Display Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen Each scheduled connection occupies one row of the table Scheduled Connections mtWtfss 08 30PM 06 00 weekly Profile 01 The first column in the table shows a one letter representation of the Days of the week from Monday M or m to Sunday S or s If a letter representing a day is capitalized the connection will be activated on that day a lower case letter means that the connection will not be activated on that day If the scheduled connection is configured for a once only connection the word once will appear instead of the days of the week The other columns show WAN and System Configuration 2 17 e The time of day that the connection will Begin At e The duration of the connection HH MM Whether it s a recurring Weekly connection or used Once Only Which connection profile Conn Prof is used to connect e Whether the scheduled connection is currently Enabled The Router checks the date and time set in scheduled connections against the system date and time
19. Default Profile and press Return The ATMP PPTP Default Profile screen appears Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 19 ATMP PPTP Default Profile Answer ATMP PPTP Connections No PPTP Configuration Options Receive Authentication PAP Data Compression Toggle Answer ATMP PPTP Connections to Yes if you want the Router to accept VPN connections or No the default if you do not For PPTP tunnel connections only you must define what type of authentication these connections will use Select Receive Authentication and press Return A pop up menu offers the following options PAP the default CHAP or MS CHAP If you chose PAP or CHAP authentication from the Data Compression pop up menu select either None the default or Standard LZS If you chose MS CHAP authentication the Data Compression option is not required and this menu item becomes hidden 4 20 Firmware User Guide VPN QuickView You can view the status of your VPN connections in the VPN QuickView screen From the Main Menu select QuickView and then VPN QuickView Main F VPN Menu 2 QuickView j QuickView The VPN QuickView screen appears VPN Quick View Profile Name ype Rx Pckts Tx Pckts RxDiscard Remote Address HA lt gt FA1 Jony Fon ATMP 99 99 0 173 166 82 8 HA lt gt FA3 Sleve M ATMP 13 14 0 173 166 117 91 Profile Name Lists the name of the Connection Profile being used if any Type Sho
20. Return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 13 The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled No IP Addressing Unnumbered Remote IP Address 173 167 8 134 Remote IP Mask 255 255 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Toggle to Yes if this is a single IP address ISP account Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel Press Escape to return to the Add Connection profile screen select COMMIT and press Return Your GRE Connection Profile will be enabled 4 14 Firmware User Guide VPN force all GRE tunnelling supports VPN force all which forces all traffic coming from the LAN onto the GRE tunnel You accomplish this by setting the default route to go through the GRE tunnel A secondary host route where all tunneled GRE packets route to the actual WAN interface can be configured as a static route when required The following table outlines various force all configurations for different networking scenarios all other options can Safely use their default values eo GRE ae GRE Profile IP Easy Setup System Configuration Menu Encapsulation Parameters Menu Menu IP IP Default Gateway Remote Tunnel End Remot
21. and uses a client and server model Netopia s PPTP implementation is compatible with Microsoft s and can function as either the client PAC or the server PNS As a client a Netopia Router can provide all users on a LAN with secure access over the Internet to the resources of another LAN by setting up a tunnel with a Windows NT server running Remote Access Services RAS or with another Netopia Router As a server a Netopia Netopia Router can provide remote users a secure connection to the resources of the LAN over a dial up cable DSL or any other type of Internet access Because PPTP can create a VPN tunnel using the Dial Up Networking DUN see Dial Up Networking for VPN on page 4 21 utility built into Windows 95 98 or NT no additional client software is required e IPsec stands for IP Security a set of protocols that supports secure exchange of IP packets at the IP layer IPsec is deployed widely to implement Virtual Private Networks VPNs IPsec supports two encryption modes Transport and Tunnel Transport mode encrypts only the data portion payload of each packet but Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 3 leaves the header untouched The more secure Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the payload On the receiving side an IPSec compliant device decrypts each packet The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports the more secure Tunnel mode DES stands for Data Encryption Standard a popular symmetric key encryption method
22. from the Main Menu go to the WAN Configuration screen then the Display Change Connection Profile screen From the pop up menu list of your Connection Profiles choose the one you want to bind your map list to Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return Main i WAN Display Change IP Profile Menu Configuration Connection Profile Parameters The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Unnumbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address 206 1 1 6 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 127 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 255 Filter Set Basic Firewall Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Select NAT Map List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined map lists 3 22 Firmware User Guide Address Trans IP Addressing NAT Map List NAT Server Li Local WAN IP Remote IP Add Remote IP Mas Filter Set Remove Filter Receive RIP IP Profile Parameters NAT Map List Name Easy PAT my map lt lt None gt gt sS mbered sy PAT 7 0 0 2 5 255 255 255 tBIOS Filter th Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Select the map list you want to bind to this Connection Profile and press Return T
23. 1 1 2 or if you prefer to have your Mail server appear to be at a different IP address 206 1 1 3 For the sake of this example alias both services to 206 1 1 2 Now as before the PAT configuration will allow any user on the Netopia Router s LAN with an IP address in the range of 192 168 1 6 through 192 168 1 254 to initiate traffic flow to the Internet Someone at the FTP server can access the Internet and the Internet can access all services of the FTP machine as if it were at 206 1 1 5 The Router cannot directly communicate with the outside world The only communication between the Web server and the Internet is through port 80 the Web port as if the server were located on a machine at IP address 206 1 1 2 Similarly the only communication with the Mail server is through port 25 the SMTP port as if it were located at IP address 206 1 1 2 3 36 Firmware User Guide Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 1 Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNs The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers IPsec PPTP and ATMP tunneling support for Virtual Private Networks VPN The following topics are covered in this chapter e Overview on page 4 1 e About PPTP Tunnels on page 4 4 e About IPsec Tunnels on page 4 7 e About L2TP Tunnels on page 4 8 e About GRE Tunnels on page 4 11 e About ATMP Tunnels on page 4 15 e Encryption Support on page 4 17 e ATMP PPTP Default Profile on page 4 18 e VPN QuickView on page 4 20 e Dial
24. 1 96 Source IP Network Address 255 255 255 255 Source IP Mask Forward No What happens on match Incoming packet has the source address of 200 1 1 96 200 1 1 96 01100000 Source address in incoming IP packet AND 255 255 255 255 11111111 Perform the logical AND 9 42 Firmware User Guide 01100000 Logical AND result Since the Source IP Network Address in the Router is 01100000 and the source IP address after the logical AND is 01100000 this rule does match and this packet will not be forwarded This rule masks off a single IP address Configuration Management Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers a Configuration Management feature Configuration Management provides a way to store several gateway configurations in a single device for use at different times You can store up to three configurations in the gateway s memory in addition to the currently running configuration The current configuration is the one currently booted from and is updated whenever there is a change to the gateway logged events parameter changes Other configurations are stored along with the current configuration Whenever you choose you can reboot into one of these configurations the copy of which becomes the current configuration You name the saved configurations giving you a reference for identifying each one The naming operation occurs when you decide to save a configuration or when downloading a c
25. 11 1 2 3 i addr 12 1 2 3 range lo addr 11 0 0 2 hi addr 11 0 0 5 local nets remote nets Advantages of Multiple Network IPsec are e scalability e flexibility by adding any combination of remote local network ranges support for sub netting host and network range addressing modes e works with manual keying and Internet Key Exchange IKE each IPsec network works under the same local remote tunnel endpoints Select Add Network and press Return The Add Network Configuration screen appears Add Network Configuration Remote Member Format Subnet Remote Member Address Range Remote Member Mask Host Address Local Member Format Local Member Address Local Member Mask The Remote Member Format and Local Member Format pop up menus allow you to choose a format for your network end points Subnet Range or a single Host Address If you choose Subnet you must enter the Remote Member Address and the subnet mask that is the Remote Member Mask Enter the Local Member Address and the Local Member Mask in their respective fields If you choose Range the next two fields become Remote Member 1st Address and Remote Member Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 15 Last Address You supply these values Complete the Local Member 1st Address and Local Member Last Address fields e If you choose Host Address you need only supply the Remote Member Address and the Local Mem ber Ad
26. 176 8 0 and subnet mask e f g h corresponding to a numbered IP mask such as 255 255 255 0 insert the following input filter anead of the current input filter 1 Enabled Yes e Forward Yes e Source IP Address a b c d Source IP Address Mask e f g h e Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 e Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 e Protocol Type O 9 32 Firmware User Guide FTP sessions To allow WAN originated FTP sessions to a LAN based FTP server with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 insert the following input filter anead of the current input filter 1 e Enabled Yes e Forward Yes Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Source IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 e Dest IP Address a b c d e Dest IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 e Protocol Type TCP Source Port Comparison No Compare Source Port ID O e Dest Port Comparison Equal e Dest Port ID 24 Note A similar filter could be used to permit Telnet or WWW access Set the Dest Port ID to 23 for Telnet or to 80 for WWW Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set However the filters in the deleted set are no longer in effect unless they are part of another set The deleted set will no longer appear in the answer profile or any connection profiles to which it was added Policy based Routing using Filtersets Previous firmware versions routed IP packets only by destination IP address Netopia Firmware Version 8
27. 2e e return Ping packet 1 j send Ping packet 2 Netopia receive Ping packet 2 send return Ping packet 2 os send Ping packet 3 Netopia pice SUE a Netopia receive return Ping packet 2 10 4 Firmware User Guide Packets Lost The number of packets unaccounted for shown in total and as a percentage of total packets sent This statistic may be updated during the Ping test and may not be accurate until after the test is over However if an escalating one to one correspondence is seen between Packets Out and Packets Lost and Packets In is noticeably lagging behind Packets Out the destination is probably unreachable In this case use STOP PING Round Trip Time Min Max Avg Statistics showing the minimum maximum and average number of seconds elapsing between the time each Ping packet was sent and the time its corresponding return Ping packet was received The time to live TTL value for each Ping packet sent by the Router is 255 the maximum allowed The TTL value defines the number of IP gateways that the packet can traverse Ping packets that reach their TTL value are dropped and a destination unreachable notification is returned to the sender see the table on the previous page This ensures that no infinite routing loops occur The TTL value can be set and retrieved using the SNMP MIB II ip group s ipDefaultTTL object Trace Route You can count the number of gateways between your Netopia Router and a given destin
28. 4 1 allowing through a firewall 4 24 ATMP tunnel options 4 15 default answer profile 4 18 encryption support 4 17 PPTP tunnel options 4 4 Ww WAN event history 8 5 WAN Ethernet Configuration 2 2 WAN event history 8 5 WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 2 32 Wi Fi Protected Access 2 31 Windows NT Domain Name 4 6 Wireless Configuration 2 30 Wireless MAC Authentication 2 34 WPA 2 31 Index 6
29. 4 now offers the ability to route IP packets using criteria other than the destination IP address This is called policy based routing You are now able to route IP traffic based on the following e source IP address source and or destination protocol field e source and or destination port numbers e TOS field You specify the routing criteria and routing information by using IP filtersets to determine the forwarding action of a particular filter In previous firmware versions a filter would either pass or block the specified traffic Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 adds a third option force routing You specify a gateway IP address and each packet matching the filter is routed according to that gateway address rather than by means of the global routing table In addition the TOS field has been added to the classifier list in a filter This allows you to filter on TOS field settings in the IP packet if you desire Security 9 33 The new filterset screen appears as follows Change Input Filter 1 Force Routing Gateway IP Address Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask TOS TOS Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare Source Port ID Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 0 Return Enter to set comparison of packet Port ID and Filter Port ID Enter the packet specific information for this filter To use the policy based routing feature you create a filt
30. ACK bit appears only with TCP not UDP The ACK bit is part of the TCP mechanism that guarantees the delivery of data The ACK bit is set whenever one side of a connection has received data from the other side Only the first TCP packet will not have the ACK bit set once the TCP connection is in place the remainder of the TCP packets with have the ACK bit set The ACK bit is helpful for firewall design and reduces the number of potential filter rules A filter rule could be created just allowing incoming TCP packets with the ACK bit set since these packets had to be originated from the local network Example filter set screen This is an example of the Netopia filter set screen Change Input Filter 1 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare Source Port ID Dest Port Compare Dest Port ID Established TCP Conns Only Yes No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCP No Compare 0 Equal 2000 No Filter basics In the source or destination IP address fields the IP address that is entered must be the network address of the subnet A host address can be entered but the applied subnet mask must be 32 bits 255 255 255 255 The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 has the ability to compare source and destination TCP or UDP ports These options are as follows No Compare Does not compare TCP or UDP port
31. Add Key Screen appears Add Key Key ID Authentication Key Start Date MM DD YY 10 10 2002 12 00 Start Time hh mm AM or PM AM End Time Mode Date End Date MM DD YY 10 10 2002 End Time hh mm 12 00 AM or PM AM IP Setup 6 13 e The key identifier Key ID can be any numeric value from O 255 and must be unique per interface You can not have two keys with the same key ID on an interface e The Authentication Key may consist of from 1 16 ASCII characters These appear as asterisks when typed 6 14 Firmware User Guide The Start Date and End Date formats are determined by the System Date Format set on the Set Date and Time menu under the System Configuration menus The Start Time and End Time formats are determined by the System Time Format The AM or PM pull down menus do not appear if the time format is 24 hour time The End Time Mode pull down menu allows you to select either Date or Infinite This determines whether or not the key will expire at a specified time and date or remain effective indefinitely End Date End Time and AM or PM do not appear if the End Time Mode is set to Infinite Infinite means that the key begins when it begins but it never expires The acceptable year range is from 1904 2039 When you are satisfied with your entries select COMMIT and press Return This menu will not accept a non unique Key ID on the same interface failure to enter an authenticati
32. Change Basic Menu Configuration Sets M FilterSet Firewall Select Display Change Input Filter Display Change Input Filter screen 2000 Yes No 6000 Yes No Select Input Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 1 screen set the Destination Port information as shown below Change Input Filter Enabled Yes Forward Yes Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type TCP Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare Equal Dest Port ID 1723 Established TCP Conns Only No Select Input Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 27 Change Input Filter 2 Enabled Yes Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type In the Display Change Filter Set screen select Display Change Output Filter Display Change Output Filter screen Yes Yes Yes Yes Select Output Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 1 screen set the Protocol Type and Destination Port information as shown below Change Output Filter 1 Enabled Yes Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compa
33. Dynamic mapping Dynamic mapping often referred to as many to few offers an extension to the advantages provided by static mapping Instead of requiring a one to one association of public addresses and private addresses as is required in static mapping dynamic mapping uses a group of public IP addresses to dynamically allocate static mappings to private hosts that are communicating with the public network If a host on the private network initiates a connection to the Internet for example the Netopia Router automatically sets up a one to one mapping of that host s private IP address to one of the public IP addresses allocated to be used for Dynamic NAT As long as this host is communicating with the Internet it will be able to use that address When traffic from that host ceases and no traffic is passed from that host for five minutes the public address is made available again for other private hosts to use as necessary When addresses are returned to the group of available addresses they are returned to the head of the group being the most recently used If that same host requests a connection an hour later and the same public address is still available then it will be mapped to the same private host If a new host which has not previously requested a connection initiates a connection it is allocated the last or oldest public address available Dynamic NAT is a way of sharing a range of public or exterior NAT addresses among one or m
34. Easy Servers NAT Options Stateful Inspection Enabled No Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Return Enter to select lt among between gt Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Toggle or enter your IP Parameters For more information see IP Setup on page 6 2 Network Address Translation NAT on page 2 23 Stateful Inspection Options on page 2 24 Filter Sets on page 2 23 The RIP Profile Options selection displays the RIP Profile Parameters screen RIP Profile Parameters Receive RIP Both vl and v2 v2 MD5 Authentication WAN and System Configuration 2 13 The Receive RIP pop up menu controls the reception and transmission of Routing Information Protocol RIP packets on the WAN port The default is Both v1 and v2 A Transmit RIP pop up menu is hidden if NAT is enabled Routing Information Protocol RIP is needed if there are IP routers on other segments of your Ethernet network that the Netopia Router needs to recognize Set to Both the default Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will accept information from either RIP v1 or v2 routers Alternatively select Receive RIP and select v1 v2 or v2 MD5 Authentication from the popup menu With Receive RIP set to v1 the Netopia Router s Ethernet port will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other router
35. IP Gateway 0 0 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 Domain Name yourdomain com Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP off Multicast Forwarding None Static Routes IP Address Serving Follow these steps to configure IP setup for your Router e Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address for the Router s Ethernet port e Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for the Ethernet IP address that you entered in the last step e Ifyou desire multiple subnets select Define Additional Subnets If you select this item you will be taken to the IP Subnets screen This screen allows you to define IP addresses and masks for additional subnets See IP subnets on page 6 4 for details IP Setup 6 3 The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports multiple IP subnets on the Ethernet interface You may want to configure multiple IP subnets to service more hosts than are possible with your primary subnet It is not always possible to obtain a larger subnet from your ISP For example if you already have a full Class C subnet your only option is multiple Class C subnets since it is virtually impossible to justify a Class A or Class B assignment If you are using NAT you can use the reserved Class A or Class B subnet Select Default IP Gateway and enter the IP address for a default gateway This can be the address of any major gateway accessible to the Router A default gateway shou
36. IP Passthrough on page 3 27 e MultiNAT Configuration Example on page 3 31 Overview NAT Network Address Translation is a means of mapping one or more IP addresses and or IP service ports into different values This mapping serves two functions e It allows the addresses of many computers on a LAN to be represented to the public Internet by only one or a few addresses saving you money It can be used as a security feature by obscuring the true addresses of important machines from potential hackers on the Internet To help you understand some of the concepts discussed here it may be helpful to introduce some NAT terminology The term mapping refers to rules that associate one or more private addresses on the Netopia Router s LAN to one or more public addresses on the Netopia Router s WAN interface typically the Internet The terms private and internal refer to addresses on the Netopia Router s LAN These addresses are considered private because they are protected or obscured by NAT and cannot be directly accessed from the WAN or Internet side of the Netopia Router unless specifically configured otherwise The terms public and external refer to the WAN or Internet side of the Netopia Router 3 2 Firmware User Guide Features MultiNAT features can be divided into several categories that can be used simultaneously in different combinations on a per Connection Profile basis The following is a general descripti
37. IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen Select Network Address Translation NAT and press Return The Network Address Translation screen appears Network Address Translation Add Public Range Show Change Public Range Delete Public Range Add Map List Show Change Map List Delete Map List Add Server List Show Change Server List Delete Server List NAT Associations Return Enter to configure IP Address redirection Public Range defines an external address range and indicates what type of mapping to apply when using this range The types of mapping available are dynamic static and pat Map Lists define collections of mapping rules A rule maps interior range addresses to exterior range addresses by the mapping techniques defined in the map list Server Lists bind internal IP addresses and ports to external IP addresses and ports so that connections initiated from the outside can access an interior server Multiple Network Address Translation 3 9 NAT rules The following rules apply to assigning NAT ranges and server lists Static public address ranges must not overlap other static PAT public addresses or the public address assigned to the Router s WAN interface e A PAT public address must not overlap any static address ranges It may be the same as another PAT address or server list address but the port range must not overlap You configure the ranges of exterior addresses
38. L2TP 4 8 latency 2 20 9 33 Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol 4 8 LED status 8 3 LEDs 8 3 line backup 7 1 backup IP gateway 7 16 connection profiles 7 2 management and statistics 7 17 scheduled connections 7 12 WAN configuration 7 8 M MIBs supported 8 10 model numbers 1 3 MPPE 4 17 MS CHAPv2 4 18 Multicast Forwarding 6 33 multiple subnets 6 4 N NAT adding server lists 3 15 defined 6 1 Easy Setup Profile 3 6 IP profile parameters 3 21 IP setup 3 7 map lists 3 8 modifying map lists 3 12 outside ranges 3 8 server lists 3 8 navigating Easy Setup 1 4 NCSA Telnet 1 4 nested IP subnets B 11 NetBIOS 6 21 NetBIOS scope 6 22 Netopia distributing IP addresses 6 17 B 5 models 1 3 monitoring 8 1 security 9 1 system utilities and diagnostics 10 1 Network Address Translation Index 3 see NAT 6 1 network problems A 2 network status overview 8 1 o output filter 1 9 31 P packet header B 14 PAT Port Address Translation 3 2 permanent virtual circuit 2 4 ping 10 2 ping test configuring and initiating 10 2 policy based routing 9 32 port number comparisons 9 20 port numbers 9 19 PPTP 4 17 tunnel options 4 4 priority queuing 2 20 PVC 2 4 Q quality of service 2 20 9 33 Quick View 8 1 R restarting the system 10 8 restricting telnet access 9 16 RFC 1483 Transparent Bridging 2 37 RIP 2 3 2 13 RIP 2 MD5 Authentication 6 10 router to serve IP addresses to hosts 6 1 routing tables IP 6 6 8 7 Index 4 S scheduled connec
39. Layer 1 Indicates a loss of sync on the Primary link Loss of Layer 2 Indicates connection profile cannot come up Loss of Layer 2 ping Indicates Backup Ping Address not responding Indicates Primary link not responding to Protocol check Loss of Layer 2 Protocol Failure LCP Echo LMI Status Request 7 18 Firmware User Guide During recovery the following reasons may appear Recovery of Layer 1 Indicates sync restored on the Primary link Indicates the backup occurred on layer 2 and Layer lt Overige Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 was set to YES Indicates that backup was on Layer 2 and the interface is fully restored including Backup Ping Layer 2 Recovery e Time Since Detection is a display only field that is only visible if backup or recovery is in progress It displays the elapsed time since detection of either WAN line failure or re establishment of the connection e Switchover Time displays how high the Time Since Detection will count before the interface switches either from Primary to Backup or from Backup to Primary This field is only visible if Backup or Recovery is set to Automatic When the current interface is Primary and a backup condition exists Switchover Time will display one of two values e f the last backup event was on layer 2 and Auto Recovery on loss of Layer 2 is set to YES it will display the Layer 2 Failure Timer value e f this is the first backup event or the las
40. Protocol Number to use Full name N A O Ignores protocol type ICMP 1 Internet Control Message Protocol TCP 6 Transmission Control Protocol UDP 17 User Datagram Protocol Src Port The source port to match This is the port on the sending host that originated the packet D Port The destination port to match This is the port on the receiving host for which the packet is intended On Displays Yes when the filter is in effect or No when it is not Fwd Shows whether the filter forwards Yes a packet or discards No it when there s a match 9 22 Firmware User Guide Filtering example 1 Returning to our filtering rule example from above see page 9 19 look at how a rule is translated into a filter Start with the rule then fill in the filter s attributes 1 The rule you want to implement as a filter is Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199 211 211 17 2 The host 199 211 211 17 is the source of the Telnet packets you want to block while the destination address is any IP address How these IP addresses are masked determines what the final match will be although the mask is not displayed in the table that displays the filter sets you set it when you create the filter In fact since the mask for the destination IP address is 0 0 0 0 the address for Dest IP Addr could have been anything The mask for Source IP Addr must be 255 255 255 255 since an exact match is desired Source IP A
41. Show Change NAT Map List screen Multiple Network Address Translation 3 15 Adding Server Lists Server lists also known as Exports are handled similarly to map lists If you want to make a particular server s port accessible and it isn t accessible through other means such as a static mapping you must create a server list Select Add Server List from the Network Address Translation screen The Add NAT Server List screen appears Add NAT Server List Server List Name my servers Add Server e Select Server List Name and type in a descriptive name A new menu item Add Server appears Select Add Server and press Return The Add NAT Server screen appears 3 16 Firmware User Guide Add NAT Server my servers Service Server Private IP Address 192 168 1 45 Public IP Address 206 1 1 1 ADD NAT SERVER e Select Service and press Return A pop up menu appears listing a selection of commonly exported services Add NAT Server my servers Port s Service telnet Server Private IP Address smtp tftp Public IP Address gopher finger www http pop2 pop3 snmp 161 162 timbuktu 407 pptp 1723 irc 6665 6669 ADD NAT SERVER e Choose the service you want to export and press Return You can choose a preconfigured service from the list or define your own by selecting Other If you select Other a screen is displayed that allows you to enter the port number range for your customiz
42. Tunnel Authentication to No or Yes If you set authentication on the tunnel an editable Pass phrase field appears where you can specify a password between eight and 15 characters long From the pop up menu select a PPP Authentication protocol for the PPP connection Options are PAP or CHAP The default is PAP The authentication protocol must be the same on both ends of the tunnel e You can specify a Data Compression algorithm either None or Standard LZS for the L2TP connection e You can specify a Send Host Name which is used with Send Secret for authenticating with a remote PNS when the profile is used for initiating a tunnel connection You must specify a Send Password or Secret the CHAP term for password used for authenticating the tunnel when initiating a tunnel connection You can specify a Receive Host Name which is used with the Receive Secret for authenticating a remote L2TP client e You must specify a Receive Password or CHAP Secret used for authenticating the remote L2TP client 4 10 Firmware User Guide e You can specify that this Router will Initiate Connections acting as a PAC or only answer them acting as a PNS Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand however you can disable this feature When disabled the tunnel must be manually established or may be scheduled using the scheduled connections feature See Scheduled Connections on page 2 15 e You can specify the Idle Timeout in seconds a
43. User Guide MS CHAP V2 and 128 bit strong encryption Notes Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports 128 bit strong encryption when using PPTP tunnels ATMP does not have an option of using 128 bit MPPE If you are using ATMP between two Netopia Routers you can optionally set 56 bit DES encryption e When you choose MS CHAP as the authentication method for a PPTP tunnel the Netopia Router will start negotiating MS CHAPv2 If the gateway or VPN adapter client you are connecting to does not support MS CHAPv2 the Netopia Router will fall back to MS CHAPv1 or if the gateway or VPN adapter client you are connecting to does not support MPPE at all the PPP session will be dropped This is done automatically and transparently ATMP PPTP Default Profile The WAN Configuration menu offers a ATMP PPTP Default Profile option Use this selection when your Router is acting as the server for VPN connections that is when you are on the answering end of the tunnel establishment The ATMP PPTP Default Profile determines the way the attempted tunnel connection is answered WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile WAN Default Profile ATMP PPTP Default Profile Scheduled Connections Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection To set the parameters under which the Router will answer attempted VPN connections select AIMP PPTP
44. YY and YY MM DD where M is month D is day and Y is year Select a System Time Format either AM PM or 24hrs Press Escape to return to the System Configuration menu Note NTP can be blocked by some firewall configurations To ensure that this feature works create a filterset rule to allow UDP port 123 to be open 2 30 Firmware User Guide Wireless configuration If your Router is a wireless model Such as a 3347W you can enable or disable the wireless LAN by selecting Wireless Configuration The Wireless Configuration screen appears Wireless LAN Configuration Enable Wireless Yes Enable Segmentation No SSID 5247 3521 Channel 6 Closed System Open Enable Privacy off Wireless MAC Authentication Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Enable Wireless is set to Yes by default When Enable Wireless is disabled No the Gateway will not provide or broadcast any wireless LAN services If you toggle Enable Wireless to No or Yes you must restart the Gateway for the change to take effect See Restarting the System on page 10 8 Segmentation Enable Segmentation This feature isolates the hosts on the wireless LAN from the hosts on the wired Ethernet LAN It also prevents the hosts on the wireless LAN from entering or enabling any VPN terminated on the Netopia Gateway If on is specified the wireless LAN will be isolated from the wired LAN if off is specified the wireless LAN will be join
45. a matching SSID the client can connect immediately if WEP is not enabled If WEP is enabled then the client must also have WEP enabled and a matching WEP key Wireless client cards from different manufacturers and different operating systems accomplish connecting to a wireless LAN and enabling WEP in a variety of ways Consult the documentation for your particular wireless card and or operating system Enable Privacy By default Enable Privacy is set to Off IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT YOU ENABLE PRIVACY WPA PSK Wi Fi Protected Access The easiest way to enable Privacy on your Wireless network is by selecting WPA PSK Pre Shared Key from the pop up menu 2 32 Firmware User Guide Wireless LAN Configuration Enable Wireless Yes Enable Segmentation No SSID 5247 3521 Channel Closed System Enable Privacy WEP Manual WEP Automatic WPA PSK Pre Shared Key Wireless MAC Authentication The Pre Shared Key field becomes visible to allow you to enter a Pre Shared Key The key can be between 8 and 63 characters but for best security it should be at least 20 characters Clients wishing to connect must also be configured to use WPA with this same key Wireless LAN Configuration Enable Wireless Yes Enable Segmentation No SSID 5247 3521 Channel 6 Closed System Open Enable Privacy WPA PSK Pre Shared Key Pre Shared Key Wireless MAC Authentication Select an 8 to 63
46. a per VC basis The default ATM class of service is UBR Quality of Service QoS settings Note QoS settings are not available on Ethernet to Ethernet WAN models Select the QoS Quality of Service setting from the pop up menu UBR CBR or VBR UBR No configuration is needed for UBR VCs Leave the default value O maximum line rate CBR One parameter is required for CBR VCs Enter the Peak Cell Rate that applies to the VC This value should be between 1 and the line rate You set this value according to specifications defined by your service provider WAN and System Configuration 2 7 Add Circuit Circuit Name Circuit 2 Circuit Enabled Yes Circuit VPI 0 255 Circuit VCI 32 65535 QoS Peak Cell Rate 0 line rate Sustained Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size 0 Use Connection Profile Default Profile Use Default Profile for Circuit ADD Circuit NOW CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes VBR This class is characterized by e a Peak Cell Rate PCR which is a temporary burst not a sustained rate and e a Sustained Cell Rate SCR e a Burst Tolerance BT specified in terms of Maximum Burst Size MBS The MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be transmitted at the peak cell rate and should be less than or equal to the Peak Cell Rate which should be less than or equal to the line rate VBR has two sub classes a VBR non real time VBR nrt Ty
47. an IP address Subnet mask information is configured as part of the process of setting up IP gateways and gateways such as the Router Note If you receive a routed account from an ISP there must be a mask associated with your network IP address By using the IP address with the mask you can discover exactly how many IP host addresses you actually have To configure subnets properly you must also be able to convert between binary notation and decimal notation Example Using subnets on a Class C IP internet When setting up IP routing with a Class A address or even with multiple Class C addresses subnetting is fairly straightforward Subnetting a single Class C address between two networks however is more complex This section describes the general procedures for subnetting a single Class C network between two Netopia gateways so that each can have Internet access B 4 Firmware User Guide Network configuration Below is a diagram of a simple network configuration The ISP is providing a Class C address to the customer site and both networks A and B want to gain Internet access through this address Router B connects to Router A and is provided Internet access through Routers A and B Customer Site A PC 1 IP Address 192 168 1 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Router B Router A IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Address 192 168 12 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Remote I
48. and press Return General Statistics Main Menu Statistics amp Logs e General Statistics The General Statistics screen displays information about data traffic on the Router s data ports This information is useful for monitoring and troubleshooting your LAN Note that the counters roll over at their maximum field width that is they restart again at O 8 8 Firmware User Guide General Statistics Physical I F Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err Ethernet Hub 1234567 123456 123456 123456 123456 12345 ATM ADSL 1 1234567 123456 123456 123456 123456 12345 Network Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Rx Pkts Tx Pkts Rx Err Tx Err IP 1234567 123456 123456 123456 123456 12345 vc Traffic Statistics Physical Interface The top left side of the screen lists total packets received and total packets transmitted for the following data ports Ethernet e DSL Network Interface The bottom left side of the screen lists total packets received and total packets transmitted e IP IP packets on the Ethernet The right side of the table lists the total number of occurrences of each of six types of communication statistics Rx Bytes The number of bytes received Tx Bytes The number of bytes transmitted Rx Packets The number of packets received Tx Pkts The number of packets transmitted Rx Err The number of bad Ethernet packets received Tx Err The number of errors
49. attempt to resend the phase 1 remote authentication timed out IKE phase 1 complete IKE phase 2 hash failure The phase 1 negotiation completed successfully The phase 2 hash failed because the data received is out of date or has been tampered with 5 22 Firmware User Guide IKE no matching ph2 proposal Either the local Router rejected the proposals of the remote or the remote rejected the local Router s IKE ph2 resend timeout The attempt to resend the phase 2 authentication timed out IKE phase 2 complete The phase 2 negotiation completed successfully IP Setup 6 1 Chapter 6 IP Setup The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 uses Internet Protocol IP to communicate both locally and with remote networks This chapter shows you how to configure the gateway to route IP traffic You also learn how to configure the gateway to serve IP addresses to hosts on your local network Netopia s IP routing features Network Address Translation and IP address serving This section covers the following topics e IP Setup on page 6 2 e RIP 2 MD5 Authentication on page 6 10 e IP Address Serving on page 6 17 e More Address Serving Options on page 6 23 e DHCP Relay Agent on page 6 28 e Connection Profiles on page 6 30 Multicast Forwarding on page 6 33 Network Address Translation allows communication between the LAN connected to the Router and the Internet using a sin
50. be served to a client If the IP address is currently leased to or reserved for a client you will be presented with a warning dialog asking you to confirm the operation Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 101 192 1 You are about to make changes that will affect an address 192 1 that is currently in use Are you sure you want to do this 192 1 192 1 192 1 192 168 1 111 192 168 1 112 192 168 1 113 Lease Management Include is displayed if the entry is either excluded or declined IP Setup 6 27 An IP address is marked declined when a client to whom the DHCP server offers the address declines the address A client declines an address if it determines that a leased address is already in use by another device Selecting Include restores the selected IP address to the address serving pool so that the IP address is once again eligible to be served to a client Release is displayed if the entry is currently offered leased or reserved Selecting Release puts the selected entry in the available state You will be presented with a warning dialog asking you to confirm the operation since the IP address is in use There is no mechanism to notify the client to whom the address is leased that the lease has been terminated Thus the client will continue to use the address until the next time it attempts to renew its lease In the interim the server may lease the
51. bi ADSL Line Configuration screen on page 2 4 Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 9 Advanced Connection Options on page 2 14 ki Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection on page 2 14 Scheduled Connections on page 2 15 bi Backup Configuration on page 2 20 7 System Configuration Screens on page 2 22 ki System configuration features on page 2 22 WAN Configuration To configure your Wide Area Network WAN connection navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select WAN Wide Area Network Setup Main WAN WAN Menu Configuration Setup The Line Configuration screen appears The Line Configuration screen will be appropriate to the type of WAN interface supported by your particular Router model 2 2 Firmware User Guide WAN Ethernet Configuration screen The WAN Ethernet Configuration screen appears as follows WAN Ethernet Configuration Address Translation Enabled Yes Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers NAT Options Stateful Inspection Enabled No Filter Set Remove Filter Set Enable PPP over Ethernet off WAN Ethernet Speed Setting Auto Negotiation Wan Ethernet MAC Address 00 fc de fa dd 02 DHCP Client Mode Standards Based RIP Options Set up the basic IP attributes of your E
52. by first adding public ranges Select Add Public Range and press Return The Add NAT Public Range screen appears Add NAT Public Range Range Name my first_range Type pat Public Address 206 1 1 6 First Public Port Last Public Port ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE e Select Range Name and give a descriptive name to this range e Select Type and from the pop up menu assign its type Options are static dynamic or pat the default e Ifyou choose pat as the range type select Public Address and enter the exterior IP address in the range you want to assign Select First and Last Public Port and enter the first and last exterior ports in the range These are the ports that will be used for traffic initiated from the private LAN to the out side world Note For PAT map lists and server lists if you use the Public Address 0 0 0 0 the list will acquire its public IP address from the WAN IP address specified by your WAN IP configuration in the Connection Profile If that is a static IP address then the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address If it is a negotiated IP address such as may be assigned via DHCP or PPP the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address each time it is negotiated e If you choose dynamic as the range type a new menu item First Public Address becomes visible Select First Public Address and enter the first exterior IP address in the range you want to assign Select Last Public Addre
53. connection You enter a human readable pass phrase or shared secret English sentence like my dog has fleas on each end once This pass phrase is used to authenticate each end to the other Thereafter the two ends periodically use a public key encryption method called Diffie Hellman to exchange key material and then securely generate new authentication and encryption keys The keys are automatically and continually changing making the data exchanged using the keys inherently secure It also allows you to specify a lifetime for the IPSec Security Association and allows encryption keys to change periodically during IPSec sessions You can set this period for key generation to as often as your security requirements dictate A Security Policy Database SPD now defines the security requirements This is a significant change from earlier firmware implementations of IPsec Traffic with a source IP address that falls within the local member specification of an IPsec tunnel and that is addressed to a destination IP address that falls within the remote member specification of that tunnel is not routed using the normal routing table Instead it is forwarded using the security policy database to the remote security gateway remote tunnel endpoint specified in the IPsec tunnel configuration It is not possible to send traffic outside the tunnel by bypassing the tunnel and the remote security gateway Note To fully protect against IP address spoofing
54. each Profile Interface name You do this by navigating to the NAT field associated with each profile using the arrow keys Toggle NAT on or off by using the Tab key e You can reassign any of your map lists or server lists to any of the Profile Interfaces You do this by navigating to the Map List Name or Server List Name field associated with each profile using the arrow keys Select the item by pressing Return to display a pop up menu of all of your configured lists 3 26 Firmware User Guide NAT Associations NAT Map List Name Profile Interface Name Server List Name Easy Setup Profile Easy PAT List my servers Profile 01 my first map my servers Profile 02 my _second_map my server list Profile 03 my map lt lt None gt gt Profile 04 lt lt None gt gt lt lt None gt gt Default Answer Profile my_ servers Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit e Select the list name you want to assign and press Return again Your selection will then be associated with the corresponding profile or interface Multiple Network Address Translation 3 27 IP Passthrough Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers an IP passthrough feature The IP passthrough feature allows for a single PC on the LAN to have the router s public address assigned to it It also provides PAT NAPT via the same public IP address for all other hosts on the private LAN subnet Using IP passthrough The public WAN IP is used to provi
55. enter an IP address and not a host name If a host name is used it may not be resolvable and may keep the interface down Select Recovery to WAN_name where WAN_name is the type of WAN connection you have such as ADSL and press Return Choose either Manual or Automatic to determine how the system will return to the WAN link when it becomes available again If you choose Automatic the next two menu items become visible e Ifyou chose Automatic Recovery select Requires Recovery of Enter the number of minutes you want the system to wait before attempting to switch back to the WAN connection This allows you to be sure that the WAN connection is well re established before the gateway switches back to it from the backup mode Press Escape twice to return to the Main Menu 7 16 Firmware User Guide IP Setup screen To configure the backup gateway from the Main Menu select System Configuration then IP Setup Main p System __ IP Menu Configuration Setup The IP Setup screen appears The IP Setup screen permits entry of a backup IP gateway address This field is always visible even if the Default IP Gateway field is not filled out as in the case of a DHCP acquired IP address and default gateway on the WAN interface IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 192 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Defa P Catewav Pe D SHES Ci erver Secondary Domain Name Server
56. event Ch The channel involved in the event The first event in each call sequence is marked with double arrows gt gt Failures are marked with an asterisk If the event history exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items To scroll up select SCROLL UP at the top of the list and press Return To scroll down select SCROLL DOWN at the bottom of the list and press Return To get more information about any event listed in the WAN Event History select the event and then press Return A dialog box containing more information about the selected event will appear Press Return or Escape to dismiss the dialog box To clear the event history select Clear History at the bottom of the history screen and press Return Device Event History The Device Event History screen lists a total of 128 port and system events giving the time and date for each event as well as a brief description The most recent events appear at the top 8 6 Firmware User Guide In the Statistics amp Logs screen select Device Event History The Device Event History screen appears Device Event History Current Date 10 11 2003 03 02 23 PM 01 22 03 7 IP address server initialization complete 01 22 03 BOOT Warm start v8 4 01 22 03 IP address server initialization complete 01 22 03 BOOT Warm start v8 4 01 22 03 IP Route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not installed 01 22 03 IP address server
57. explicitly denied is allowed The first rule is far more secure and is the best approach to firewall design It is far easier and more secure to allow in or out only certain services and deny anything else If the other rule is used you would have to figure out everything that you want to disallow now and in the future Firewall Logic Firewall design is a test of logic and filter rule ordering is critical If a packet is forwarded through a series of filter rules and then the packet matches a rule the appropriate action is taken The packet will not forward through the remainder of the filter rules For example if you had the following filter set Allow WWW access Allow FTP access Allow SMTP access Deny all other packets and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP the packet would forward through the first rule WWW go through the second rule FTP and match this rule the packet is allowed through If you had this filter set for example Allow WWW access Allow FTP access Deny FTP access Deny all other packets Security 9 37 and a packet goes through these rules destined for FTP the packet would forward through the first filter rule WWW match the second rule FTP and the packet is allowed through Even though the next rule is to deny all FTP traffic the FTP packet will never make it to this rule Binary representation It is easiest when doing filtering to convert the IP address and mask
58. field totally Leaving 0 0 0 0 in this field tells the router to ping an address that does not exist Select Recovery to ADSL and press Return Choose either Manual or Automatic to determine how the system will return to the primary WAN link when it becomes available again If you choose Automatic the next two menu items become visible Note Automatic recovery only works upon loss of primary WAN connectivity e Ifyou chose Automatic Recovery select Requires Recovery of minutes and enter the number of min utes that the system should wait before it assumes that a connection has been re established This allows you to be sure that the primary WAN connection is well re established before the router switches back to it from the backup mode If the router s primary connection fails at layer 1 the Requires Recovery of minutes parameter determines the amount of time the primary layer 1 connec tion must be up recovered before the router will tear down the backup connection and revert to the primary interface Select Clear Backup Call only if idle The default Yes will prevent the backup call from being torn down if there is activity on the backup connection when the primary connection comes back up You can toggle this to No if you wish The Clear Backup Call only if Idle timer is a separate timer from the Requires Recovery of minutes timer The router will first reach the Requires Recovery of minutes counter and count down to zero Then th
59. from Go to the System Configuration screen Select IP Address Serving and press Return The IP Address Serving screen will appear IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode Disabled DHCP Server Number of Client IP Addresses DHCP Relay Agent lst Client Address Client Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Serve DHCP Clients Yes DHCP Lease Time Hours 1 DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve BOOTP Clients Serve Dynamic WAN Clients 6 18 Firmware User Guide Follow these steps to configure IP Address Serving If you enabled IP Address Serving then DHCP BootP clients and Dynamic WAN clients are automatically enabled The IP Address Serving Mode pop up menu allows you to choose the way in which the Router will serve IP addresses The device can act as either a DHCP Server or a DHCP Relay Agent See DHCP Relay Agent on page 6 28 for more information In most cases you will use the device to serve its own pool of IP addresses hence DHCP Server is the default Address serving can also be disabled Select Number of Client IP Addresses and enter the total number of contiguous IP addresses that the Router will distribute to the client machines on your local area network Twelve user models are limited to twelve IP addresses In the screen example shown above five Client IP addresses have been allocated Select st Client Address and enter the first client IP address that you will allocate to your first client machine For
60. given in IP Address Serving on page 6 17 Network Address Translation NAT These screens allow you to configure the Multiple Network Address Translation MultiNAT features e Details are given in Multiple Network Address Translation on page 3 1 Stateful Inspection Stateful inspection is a security feature that prevents unsolicited inbound access when NAT is disabled You can configure UDP and TCP no activity periods that will also apply to NAT time outs if stateful inspection is enabled on the interface Stateful Inspection parameters are active on a WAN interface only if enabled on your Gateway Stateful inspection can be enabled on a profile whether NAT is enabled or not Stateful Inspection UDP no activity timeout sec TCP no activity timeout sec Add Exposed Address List Exposed Address Associations Return Enter goes to new screen Return Enter to configure Xposed IP addresses 2 24 Firmware User Guide e UDP no activity time out The time in seconds after which a UDP session will be terminated if there is no traffic on the session TCP no activity time out The time in seconds after which an TCP session will be terminated if there is no traffic on the session Exposed Addresses The hosts specified in Exposed addresses will be allowed to receive inbound traffic even if there is no corresponding outbound traffic This is active only if NAT is disabled on an WAN interface Stateful
61. have a priority The first filter has the highest priority and the last filter has the lowest priority How individual filters work As described above a filter applies criteria to an IP packet and then takes one of three actions Forwards the packet to the local or remote network Security 9 19 e Blocks discards the packet e Ignores the packet A filter forwards or blocks a packet only if it finds a match after applying its criteria When no match occurs the filter ignores the packet A filtering rule The criteria are based on information contained in the packets A filter is simply a rule that prescribes certain actions based on certain conditions For example the following rule qualifies as a filter Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host 199 211 211 17 This rule applies to Telnet packets that come from a host with the IP address 199 211 211 17 If a match occurs the packet is blocked Here is what this rule looks like when implemented as a filter on the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 To understand this particular filter look at the parts of a filter Parts of a filter A filter consists of criteria based on packet attributes A typical filter can match a packet on any one of the following attributes e The source IP address where the packet was sent from The destination IP address where the packet is going The type of higher layer Internet protocol the packet is carrying such as TCP
62. how to load MIBs Monitoring Tools 8 11 The SNMP Setup screen From the Main Menu select SNMP in the System Configuration screen and press Return The SNMP Setup screen appears System Main Configuration SNMP Menu SNMP Setup System Name System Location System Contact System Trap Version Read Only Community String Read Write Community String Authentication Traps Enable IP Trap Receivers SNMP V3 Setup Follow these steps to configure the first three items in the screen 1 2 3 4 Select System Name and enter a descriptive name for the Router s SNMP agent Select System Location and enter the gateway s physical location room floor building etc Select System Contact and enter the name of the person responsible for maintaining the gateway Select the SNMP Trap Version and choose either SNMP V1 or SNMP V2c SNMP V2c is a more feature rich version but is not supported by all vendors Consult with your service provider System Name System Location and System Contact set the values returned by the Router SNMP agent for the SysName SysLocation and SysContact objects respectively in the MIB Il system group Although optional the information you enter in these items can help a system administrator manage the network more efficiently 8 12 Firmware User Guide Community strings The Read Only Community String and the Read Write Community String are like pa
63. in question to binary This will allow you to perform the logical AND to determine whether a packet matches a filter rule Logical AND function When a packet is compared in most cases a logical AND function is performed First the IP addresses and subnet masks are converted to binary and then combined with AND The rules for the logical use of AND are as follows O ANDO 0 OAND1 0 1 ANDO 0 1AND1 1 For example Filter rule Deny IP 163 176 1 15BINARY 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 Mask 255 255 255 255BINARY 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 Incoming Packet IP 163 176 1 15BINARY 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 If you put the incoming packet and subnet mask together with AND the result is 10100011 10110000 00000001 00001111 which matches the IP address in the filter rule and the packet is denied Implied rules With a given set of filter rules there is an Implied rule that may or may not be shown to the user The implied rule tells the filter set what to do with a packet that does not match any of the filter rules An example of implied rules is as follows Implied Meaning Y Y Y N If all filter rules are YES the implied rule is NO N N N Y If all filter rules are NO the implied rule is YES Y N Y N If a mix of YES and NO filters the implied rule is NO 9 38 Firmware User Guide Established connections The TCP header contains one bit called the ACK bit or TCP Ack bit This
64. instance on your local area network you may want to first figure out which machines are going to be allocated specific static IP addresses so that you can determine the pool of IP addresses that you will be serving addresses from via DHCP BootP and or Dynamic WAN Example Your ISP has given your Router the IP address 192 168 6 137 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 248 The subnet mask allocated will give you six IP addresses to use when connecting to the ISP over the Internet Your address range will be from 137 143 In this example you would enter 192 168 6 138 as the 1st Client Address since the gateway itself must have an IP address To enable DHCP select Serve DHCP Clients and toggle it to Yes DHCP serving is automatic when IP Address Serving is enabled The default DHCP Lease time is one hour This may be unnecessarily brief in your network environment Consequently the DHCP lease time is configurable The DHCP Lease Time Hours setting allows you to modify the gateway s default lease time of one hour You can enter any number up to and including 168 hours one week for the DHCP lease Note About DHCP Auto configuration Certain model gateways whose model number ends in will allow the IP Address Server to auto configure when the gateway is configured with a new IP Address and Subnet Mask This applies according to the following guidelines e If you configure the gateway with a 24 bit Subnet Mask Class C the gateway w
65. is not enabled in your Internet Connection Profile Netopia includes the NetBIOS Proxy feature as an enhancement and convenience for our customers It has been lab tested and many customers use it successfully However Netopia cannot guarantee that this feature will automatically give you the networking functionality you expect There are many possible issues with the various Windows operating systems that may prevent NetBIOS from functioning as described above Netopia Technical Support does not troubleshoot problems customers may encounter with their Windows operating system 4 34 Firmware User Guide Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 1 Chapter 5 Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs IPsec stands for IP Security a set of protocols that supports secure exchange of IP packets at the IP layer IPsec is deployed widely to implement Virtual Private Networks VPNs See Virtual Private Networks VPNs on page 4 1 for more information The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports Internet Key Exchange IKE for secure encrypted communication over a VPN tunnel This chapter covers the following topics e Overview on page 5 1 e Internet Key Exchange IKE Configuration on page 5 2 e Key Management on page 5 8 e IPsec WAN Configuration Screens on page 5 18 e IPsec Manual Key Entry on page 5 19 Overview IPsec supports two encapsulation modes Transport and Tu
66. numbers Since the InterNIC assigns the network number proper it should not change so the subnet numbers must be created out of bits that would otherwise be part of the host numbers Understanding IP Addressing B 3 Subnet masks To create subnets the network manager must define a subnet mask a 32 bit number that indicates which bits in an IP address are used for network and subnetwork addresses and which are used for host addresses One subnet mask should apply to all IP networks that are physically connected together and share a single assigned network number Subnet masks are often written in decimal notation like IP addresses but they are most easily understood in binary notation When a subnet mask is written in binary notation each numeral 1 indicates that the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network or subnet address Each O indicates that the corresponding bit is part of the host address The following table shows the proper subnet masks to use for each class of network when no subnets are required Class Subnet mask for a network with no subnets A Binary 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 Decimal 255 0 0 0 B Binary 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 Decimal 255 255 0 0 C Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Decimal 255 255 255 0 To know whether subnets are being used or not you must know what subnet mask is being used you cannot determine this information simply from
67. of a full Internet address For example you might obtain the Class C address 199 14 17 48 with the mask 255 255 255 240 From the previous example you can see that this gives you 14 host addresses to distribute to the hosts at your site In effect your existing network of 10 hosts is a subnet of the ISP s network Since the Class C address has already been reduced to subnets you cannot further subnet your network without the risk of creating network routing problems since you must use the mask issued by the ISP This however is not a problematic limitation for your small network The advantages of this situation are the greater ease and lower cost of obtaining a subnet rather than a full Class C address from an ISP Distributing IP Addresses To set up a connection to the Internet you may have obtained a block of IP host addresses from an ISP When configuring the Router you gave one of those addresses to its Ethernet port leaving a number of addresses to distribute to computers on your network There are two schemes for distributing the remaining IP addresses e Manually give each computer an address e Let the Router automatically distribute the addresses B 6 Firmware User Guide These two methods are not mutually exclusive you can manually issue some of the addresses while the rest are distributed by the Router Using the gateway in this way allows it to function as an address server One reason to use the Router as an add
68. of a host to ping Send ICMP Echo Requests to a network host To configure and initiate a Ping test follow these steps 1 2 Select Name of Host to Ping and enter the destination domain name or IP address Select Packets to Send to change the default setting This is the total number of packets to be sent during the Ping test The default setting is adequate in most cases but you can change it to any value from 1 to 4 294 967 295 Select Data Size to change the default setting This is the size in bytes of each Ping packet sent The default setting is adequate in most cases but you can change it to any value from O only header data to 1664 Select Delay seconds to change the default setting The delay in seconds determines the time between Ping packets sent The default setting is adequate in most cases but you can change it to any value from O to 4 294 967 A delay of O seconds forces packets to be sent immediately one after another Select START PING and press Return to begin the Ping test While the test is running the START PING item becomes STOP PING To manually stop the Ping test select STOP PING and press Return or Escape While the Ping test is running and when it is over a status field and a number of statistical items are active on the screen These are described below Utilities and Diagnostics 10 3 Status The current status of the Ping test This item can display the status messages shown in the able
69. of such traffic you can configure your router to prioritize this type of traffic using the priority queuing feature To configure your router to prioritize delay sensitive data navigate to the Advanced Connection Options screen in the console menu Main WAN Advanced Connection Menu Configuration Options The Advanced Connection Options screen appears WAN and System Configuration 2 21 Advanced Connection Options Scheduled Connections Backup Configuration Prioritize Delay Sensitive Data No Return Enter to configure SA Backup Parameters The Router will recognize a delay sensitive packet as having the low latency bit set in the TOS field of the IP header If you toggle Prioritize Delay Sensitive Data to Yes the router will place these packets at the front of the transmission queue to the WAN link overtaking non delay sensitive traffic Accepting the default No will allow the normal sequential queue of data packets 2 22 Firmware User Guide System Configuration Screens System configuration features The Netopia Router s default settings may be all you need to configure Some users however require advanced settings or prefer manual control over the default selections For these users the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 provides system configuration options IP Setup on page 2 23 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol on page 2 36
70. on page 7 17 QuickView on page 7 18 The purpose of line backup is to provide a recovery mechanism in the event that the primary connection fails A failure can be either line loss for example by central site switch failure or physical cable breakage or loss of end to end connectivity Detection of one of these failures causes the router to switch from using the primary DSL WAN connection to using a built in V 92 modem Alternatively you can choose backup to an alternate gateway on the Ethernet LAN In the event of a loss of primary connectivity you have the option of switching back to the primary port automatically once it has recovered its connection Configuring Backup The following menus support backup configuration the Add Connection Profile menus under the WAN Configuration menus Here you choose Encapsulation Type PPP fill out the correct IP Profile Parameters information select Backup as the Interface Group and fill out the Telco Options See Connection Profiles on page 7 2 the MODEM Wan Module 2 Setup menu under the WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup menus Here you configure the Internal Modem Setup that governs a number of general behavior settings for the internal V 92 modem See WAN Configuration on page 7 8 e the Backup Configuration menu under WAN Configuration Advanced Connection Options Here you can select Backup is Automatic and Recovery is Automatic See Backup Config
71. on source or destination IP addresses TCP or UDP ports or the TCP ACK bit Port A number that defines a particular type of service Basic IP packet components All IP packets contain the same basic header information as follows Source IP Address 163 176 132 18 Destination IP Address 163 176 4 27 Source Port 2541 Destination Port 80 Protocol TCP ACK Bit Yes DATA User Data This header information is what the packet filter uses to make filtering decisions It is important to note that a packet filter does not look into the IP data stream the User Data from above to make filtering decisions Basic protocol types TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP provides reliable packet delivery and has a retransmission mechanism so packets are not lost RFC 793 is the specification for TCP UDP User Datagram Protocol Unlike TCP UDP does not guarantee reliable sequenced packet delivery If data does not reach its destination UDP does not retransmit the data RFC 768 is the specification for UDP There are many more ports defined in the Assigned Addresses RFC The table that follows shows some of these port assignments 9 36 Firmware User Guide Example TCP UDP Ports TCP Port Service UDP Port Service 20 21 FTP 161 SNMP 23 Telnet 69 TFTP Firewall design rules There are two basic rules to firewall design e What is not explicitly allowed is denied and e What is not
72. or UDP Port numbers A filter can also match a packet s port number attributes but only if the filter s protocol type is set to TCP or UDP since only those protocols use port numbers The filter can be configured to match the following e The source port number the port on the sending host that originated the packet The destination port number the port on the receiving host that the packet is destined for By matching on a port number a filter can be applied to selected TCP or UDP services such as Telnet FTP and World Wide Web The following tables show a few common services and their associated port numbers Internet service TCP port Internet service TCP port FTP 20 21 Finger 79 Telnet 23 World Wide Web 80 9 20 Firmware User Guide SMTP mail 25 News 144 Gopher 70 rlogin 513 Who Is 43 AppleTalk Routing 202 Maintenance at rtmp World Wide Web 80 AppleTalk Name Binding 202 at nbp SNMP 161 AURP AppleTalk 387 TFTP 69 who 513 Port number comparisons A filter can also use a comparison option to evaluate a packet s source or destination port number The comparison options are No Compare No comparison of the port number specified in the filter with the packet s port number Not Equal To For the filter to match the packet s port number cannot equal the port number specified in the filter Less Than For the filter to match the packet s po
73. or enter any IP parameters you require and return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape For more information on NAT see Multiple Network Address Translation beginning on page 3 1 The Local WAN IP Address is displayed for numbered or NAT profiles The Local WAN IP Mask is displayed for numbered profiles The Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask are displayed for unnumbered profiles 5 Select ADD PROFILE NOW and press Return Your new connection profile will be added If you want to view the connection profiles in your gateway return to the WAN Configuration screen and select Display Change Connection Profile The list of connection profiles is displayed in a scrolling pop up screen WAN Configuration IP Address Easy Setup Profile 127 0 0 2 Profile 1 0 0 0 0 Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit IP Setup 6 33 Multicast Forwarding Multicast is a method for transmitting large amounts of information to many but not all hosts over an Internet One common use is to distribute real time audio and video to the set of hosts which have joined a distributed conference Multicast is similar to radio or TV broadcasts in the sense that only those who have tuned in to a particular frequency receive the information You see and hear the channel you are interested in but not the others Since a gateway should not be used as a passive forwarding device Netopia gateways use a protocol
74. or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Service requirements In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs should be performed by our Company or an authorized agent It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to our Company or to one of our authorized agents Service can be obtained at Netopia Inc 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville California 94608 Telephone 510 597 5400 Note Important This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of shielded cables and connectors between system components Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by the manufacturer could void your authority to operate the equipment Canada This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Declaration for Canadian users NOTICE The Canadian Industry Canada l
75. same IP address to a different client thereby creating an address conflict For this reason releasing an address that is actively being used by a client is generally not recommended e Reserve is displayed if the entry is available declined excluded leased offered or reserved Reserving an IP address for a client with a particular Ethernet MAC address guarantees that a client with the specified MAC address will be offered or leased the specified IP address Moreover it prevents the specified IP address from being offered or leased to any other client Selecting Reserve displays a pop up dialog box that displays the IP address and editable item in which you can enter an Ethernet MAC address The pop up dialog box includes OK and CANCEL buttons for confirming or cancelling the operation If the IP address is currently offered or leased to or reserved for a client you will be presented with a warning dialog asking you to confirm the operation Reserving an IP address guarantees that the IP address will only be leased Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP IP Address is 192 168 1 108 MAC Address 00 00 c5 45 89 ef OK Lease Management The gateway s Ethernet IP address es will be automatically excluded from the address serving pool s on startup Entries in the served IP address list corresponding to the gateway s Ethernet IP address es that have been automatically excluded on
76. that the static route takes precedence over RIP information Low means that the RIP information takes precedence over the static route e Ifthe static route conflicts with a connection profile the connection profile will always take precedence IP Setup 6 9 To make sure that the static route is known only to the Router select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to No To allow other RIP capable gateways to know about the static route select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to Yes When Advertise Route Via RIP is toggled to Yes a new item called RIP Metric appears below Advertise Route Via RIP With RIP Metric you set the number of gateways from 1 to 15 between the sending gateway and the destination gateway The maximum number of gateways on a packet s route is 15 Setting RIP Metric to 1 means that a route can involve 15 gateways while setting it to 15 means a route can only involve one gateway Select ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW to save the new static route or select CANCEL to discard it and return to the Static Routes screen Up to 32 static routes can be created but one is always reserved for the default gateway which is configured using either Easy Setup or the IP Setup screen in system configuration Modifying a static route To modify a static route in the Static Routes screen select Display Change Static Route to display a table of static routes Select a static route from the table and go to the Change Static R
77. the arrow keys to select the one you want to change and press Return You will be returned to the Network Configuration screen where you can make any required changes e If you select Delete Network in the IP Profile Parameters screen the same scrolling list will display When you select one of the networks and press Return a warning screen will ask you to confirm your choice Are you sure you want to delete this network configuration CONTINUE Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 17 Specifying IKE key management alters the Advanced IP Profile Options screen as follows Advanced IP Profile Options Local Tunnel Endpoint Address Next Hop Gateway Idle Timeout seconds e You can specify a Local Tunnel Endpoint Address If not 0 0 0 0 this value must be one of the assigned interface addresses either WAN or LAN This is used as the source address of all IPsec traffic e You can specify a Next Hop Gateway If you specify the Remote Tunnel Endpoint Address and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote Members Network you specified in the IP Profile Parameters the Next Hop Gateway option allows you to enter the address by which the Router partner is reached If you do not specify the Remote Tunnel Endpoint Address the Router will use the default gateway to reach the partner If the partner should be reached via an alternate port for example the LAN instead of the WAN the Next Hop Gateway fie
78. the connection or to answer it When used in this way the Routers are said to be tunnelling through the public network Internet The advantages are that like your long distance phone call you don t need a direct line between one computer or LAN and the other but use the local connections making it much cheaper and the information you exchange through your tunnel is private and secure Tunneling is a process of creating a private path between a remote user or private network and another private network over some intermediate network such as the IP based Internet A VPN allows remote offices or employees access to your internal business LAN through means of encryption allowing the use of the public Internet to look virtually like a private secure network When two networks communicate with each other through a network based on the Internet Protocol they are said to be tunneling through the IP network Logical c D Equivalent D SEZ Unlike the phone company private and public computer networks can use more than one protocol to carry your information over the wires Several such protocols are in common use for tunnelling Point to Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP IP Security IPSec Layer 2 Transport Protocol L2TP Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE and Ascend Tunnel Management Protocol ATMP The Netopia Router can use any of these e Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is an extension of Point to Point Protocol PPP
79. the encryption Examples 40bit O2468ACE02 128bit 01234567 89ABCDEFO123456789 256bit 592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F592CA140F0A238B0C61AE162F21A09C Wireless MAC Authentication Wireless MAC Authentication allows you to specify which client PCs are allowed to join the wireless LAN by specific hardware address Once it is enabled only entered MAC addresses that have been set to Allow will be accepted onto the wireless LAN All unlisted addresses will be blocked in addition to the listed addresses with Allow disabled To enable Wireless MAC Authentication select Wireless MAC Authentication and press Return WAN and System Configuration 2 35 The Wireless MAC Authorization screen appears Authorized Wireless MAC Addresses Enable MAC Authentication Yes Display Change MAC Addresses Add MAC Address Delete MAC Address To enable Wireless Mac Authorization toggle Enable MAC Authentication to Yes You can toggle it to No to disable it at any time Select Add MAC Address and press Return The Add Wireless MAC Address screen appears Add Wireless MAC Address Wireless MAC Allowed Yes Wireless MAC Address 00 0a 27 ae 71 a4 ADD WIRELESS MAC NOW CANCEL Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Configure a new Wireless MAC in this Screen Enter the MAC hardware address of the client PC you want to authorize for access to your wireless LAN Wireless MAC Allowed is set to Yes enabled by default Toggli
80. the internal range of NATed addresses and the external range they are to be associated with 4 Associate the Map or Server List to your WAN interface via a Connection Profile or the Default Profile The three NAT features all operate completely independently of each other although they can be used simultaneously on the same Connection Profile You can configure a simple 1 to many PAT often referred to simply as NAT mapping using Easy Setup More complex setups require configuration using the Network Address Translation item on the IP Setup screen An example MultiNAT configuration at the end of this chapter describes some applications for these features See the MultiNAT Configuration Example on page 3 31 In order to configure the Router to make servers on your LAN visible to the Internet you use advanced features in the System Configuration screens described in IP setup IP setup To access the NAT configuration screens from the Main Menu navigate to IP Setup Main System IP Menu Configuration Setup 3 8 Firmware User Guide IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 192 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway 127 0 0 2 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Domain Name isp com Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP off Static Routes IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Set up the basic
81. this feature allows you to turn off the routing features and use your device as a bridge It is not an option for Ethernet WAN models If you select this option the device will restart itself and reset all the settings to factory defaults Any configurations you have made will be erased Use this feature with caution If you decide to reinstate the routing capabilities you must reconfigure the device from scratch From the Main Menu select System Configuration System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Date and Time SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Bridge Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Select Change Device to a Bridge and press Return You will be challenged to confirm this choice This change requires a reboot and will result in Factory Defaulting the device CONTINUE If you chose CONTINUE the device will reboot and restart in bridge mode Routing features will be disabled and the Telnet menus corresponding configuration items such as Easy Setup will be removed 2 38 Firmware User Guide Netopia Router WAN Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick View You can reinstate Router mode by returning to the System Configuration menu System Configuration Manag
82. to do that now Adding an IKE Phase 1 Profile IKE Phase 1 Profiles contain the information that the two ends of a tunnel use to authenticate each other and the parameters that govern the public key cryptography exchanges that are required to generate new keys periodically Make sure to add an IKE Phase 1 Profile If an IKE Phase 1 Profile is not assigned to an IKE Connection Profile all VPN traffic for that profile will be discarded Select ADD PH1 PROFILE The Add IKE Phase 1 Profile screen appears Add IKE Phase 1 Profile Profile Name Mode Local Identity Type Local Identity Value Remote Identity Type Remote Identity Value Authentication Method Shared Secret Encryption Algorithm Hash Algorithm Diffie Hellman Group Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options ADD IKE PHASE 1 PROFILE IKE Profile 1 Aggressive Mode IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 Shared Secret kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk des md5 Group 2 1024 bits Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs _ 5 5 The Profile Name field accepts any name of up to 16 characters Sixteen IKE Phase 1 profiles are supported since each of the potential sixteen Connection Profiles may be associated with a separate IKE Phase 1 profile The Mode pop up menu allows you to choose between Main Mode the default and Aggressive Mode In Main Mode the Router hides the Local and Remote Identity Type and Value fields defaults to the h
83. tools for monitoring and diagnosing the Router s behavior as well as for updating the firmware and rebooting the system See Chapter 10 Utilities and Diagnostics e The Statistics amp Logs menus display several sets of tables and device logs that show information about your Router your network and their history See Statistics amp Logs beginning on page 8 4 e The Quick Menus screen is a shortcut entry point to a variety of the most commonly used configuration menus that are accessed through the other menu entry points e The Quick View menu displays at a glance current real time operating information about your Router See Quick View Status Overview on page 8 1 Netopia Models This Firmware User Guide covers all of the Netopia 3300 Series Router models However some information in this guide will only apply to a specific model Screen differences Because different Netopia 3300 Series models offer many different features and interfaces the options shown on some screens in this Firmware User Guide may not appear on your own particular model s Telnet screen These differences are noted throughout the manual Connecting through a Telnet Session Features of the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 can be configured through the Telnet screens Before you can access the console screens through Telnet you must have e A network connection locally to the Router or IP access to the Router e Telnet software inst
84. tunnel connection e You must specify a Send Password the CHAP and MS CHAP term for password used for authenticating the tunnel when initiating a tunnel connection e You can specify a Receive Host Name which is used with the Receive Secret for authenticating a remote PPTP client e You must specify a Receive Password used for authenticating the remote PPTP client e You can specify that this Router will Initiate Connections acting as a PAC or only answer them acting as a PNS e Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand however you can disable this feature When disabled the tunnel must be manually established or may be scheduled using the scheduled connections feature See Scheduled Connections on page 2 15 Some networks that use Microsoft Windows NT PPTP Network Servers require additional authentication information called Windows NT Domain Name when answering PPTP tunnel connection requests Not all Windows NT installations require this information since not all such installations use this authentication feature The Windows NT Domain Name is not the same as the Internet domain name but is the name of a group of servers that share common security policy and user account databases Your PPTP tunnel partner s administrator will supply this Windows NT Domain Name if it is required If you configure your Router to initiate PPTP tunnel connections by toggling Initiate Connections to Yes the Optional Windows NT Domain Name fiel
85. two basic aspects Tunnels are created and torn down using a session protocol that is UDP based User or client data is transferred across the tunnel by encapsulating the client data within Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE The GRE data is then routed using standard methods ATMP configuration ATMP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles It is not an option in device or link configuration screens since ATMP is not a native encapsulation The Easy Setup Profile does not offer ATMP datalink encapsulation See Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 9 for information on creating Connection Profiles The WAN Event History screens will report VPN tunnel events such as connections and disconnections as Channel 4 and higher events To define an ATMP tunnel navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu WAN Configuration Add Connection Profile Main Menu Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 2 Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Underlying Encapsulation Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary 4 16 Firmware User Guide When you define a Connection Profile as using ATMP by selecting ATMP as the datalink encapsulation method and then select Data Link Options the ATMP Tunnel Options screen appears ATMP Tunnel Options ATMP Partner IP Address 173 167 8 134 Tunnel Via Gateway 0 0 0 0 Network
86. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e To delete a configured subnet set both the IP address and subnet mask values to 0 0 0 0 either explicitly or by clearing each field and pressing Return to commit the change When a configured subnet is deleted the values in subsequent rows adjust up to fill the vacant fields The subnets configured on this screen are tied to the address serving pools configured on the IP Address Pools screen and that changes on this screen may affect the IP Address Pools screen In particular deleting a subnet configured on this screen will delete the corresponding address serving pool if any on the IP Address Pools screen 6 6 Firmware User Guide If you have configured multiple Ethernet IP subnets the IP Setup screen changes slightly IP Setup Subnet Configuration Default IP Gateway 192 128 117 163 Primary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Receive RIP Both Transmit RIP v2 multicast Static Routes IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen The IP address and Subnet mask items are hidden and the Define Additional Subnets item becomes Subnet Configuration If you select Subnet Configuration you will return to the IP Subnets screen that allows you to define IP addresses and masks for additional Ethernet IP subnets Static routes Static routes are IP routes that are maint
87. 0 54 110110 86 1010110 118 1110110 23 10111 55 110111 87 1010111 119 1110111 24 11000 56 111000 88 1011000 120 1111000 25 11001 57 111001 89 1011001 121 1111001 26 11010 58 111010 90 1011010 122 1111010 27 11011 59 111011 91 1011011 123 1111011 28 11100 60 111100 92 1011100 124 1111100 29 11101 61 111101 93 1011101 125 1111101 C 2 Firmware User Guide Decimal Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 30 62 111110 94 1011110 126 1111110 31 63 111111 95 1011111 127 1111111 Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 128 10000000 160 10100000 192 11000000 224 11100000 129 10000001 161 10100001 193 11000001 225 11100001 130 10000010 162 10100010 194 11000010 226 11100010 131 10000011 163 10100011 195 11000011 227 11100011 132 10000100 164 10100100 196 11000100 228 11100100 133 10000101 165 10100101 197 11000101 229 11100101 134 10000110 166 10100110 198 11000110 230 11100110 135 10000111 167 10100111 199 11000111 231 11100111 136 10001000 168 10101000 200 11001000 232 11101000 137 10001001 169 10101001 201 11001001 233 11101001 138 10001010 170 10101010 202 11001010 234 11101010 139 10001011 171 10101011 203 11001011 235 11101011 140 10001100 172 10101100 204 11001100 236 11101100 141 10001101 173 10101101 205 11001101 237 11101101 142 10001110 174 10101110 206 11001110 238 11101110 143 10001111 175 10101111 207 110011
88. 11 239 11101111 144 10010000 176 10110000 208 11010000 240 11110000 145 10010001 177 10110001 209 11010001 241 11110001 146 10010010 178 10110010 210 11010010 242 11110010 147 10010011 179 10110011 211 11010011 243 11110011 148 10010100 180 10110100 212 11010100 244 11110100 149 10010101 181 10110101 213 11010101 245 11110101 150 10010110 182 10110110 214 11010110 246 11110110 151 10010111 183 10110111 215 11010111 247 11110111 152 10011000 184 10111000 216 11011000 248 11111000 153 10011001 185 10111001 217 11011001 249 11111001 154 10011010 186 10111010 218 11011010 250 11111010 155 10011011 187 10111011 219 11011011 251 11111011 156 10011100 188 10111100 220 11011100 252 11111100 157 10011101 189 10111101 221 11011101 253 11111101 158 10011110 190 10111110 222 11011110 254 11111110 Binary Conversion Table C 3 C 4 Firmware User Guide Technical Specifications and Safety Information D 1 Appendix D Technical Specifications and Safety Information Description Dimensions 13 5 cm w x 13 5 cm d x 3 5 cm h 5 25 w x 5 25 d x 1 5 h Communications interfaces The Netopia 3300 Series Routers have an RJ 11 jack for DSL line connections or an RJ 45 jack for Ethernet WAN line connections and 1 or 4 port 10 100Base T Ethernet switch for your LAN connections Some models have a USB port that can be used to connect to your PC in some cases the USB port also serves as the power source Some models contain an 80
89. 2 11b wireless LAN transmitter Power requirements 12 VDC input e 1 0 amps USB powered models only For Use with Listed T E Only Environment Operating temperature 0 to 40 C Storage temperature 0 to 70 C Relative storage humidity 20 to 80 noncondensing Software and protocols Software media Software preloaded on internal flash memory field upgrades done via download to internal flash memory via TFTP Routing TCP IP Internet Protocol Suite RIP WAN support PPPoE DHCP static IP address Security PAP Ul password security Management configuration methods Telnet SNMP Command Line Interface CLI Diagnostics Ping event logging routing table displays traceroute statistics counters D 2 Firmware User Guide Agency approvals North America Safety Approvals e United States UL 60950 Third Edition Canada CSA CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EMC e United States FCC Part 15 Class B e Canada ICES 003 Telecom e United States FCC Part 68 e Canada CS 03 International Safety Approvals Low Voltage European directive 73 23 EN60950 Europe EMI Compatibility e 89 336 EEC European directive EN55022 1994 CISPR22 Class B e EN300 386 V1 2 1 non wireless products e EN 301 489 wireless products Regulatory notices European Community This Netopia product conforms to the European Community CE Mark standard for the design and manufacturing of informa
90. 5 authentication you must select v2 MDS5 either broadcast or multicast e Ifyou chose any Transmit RIP option other than Off TX RIP Policy is visible Here you select Poison Reverse Split Horizon or No Split Horizon from the pull down menu Unless otherwise instructed leave the default Poison Reverse If either Receive RIP or Transmit RIP is set to v2 MD5 Authentication RIP v2 Authentication Keys is visible Selecting RIP v2 Authentication Keys takes you to the RIP v2 Authentication Keys screen where you can configure your keys in the same manner as in Adding a key on page 13 After configuring your key press COMMIT in the Add or Change Key screen then press Escape three times to return to the Add or Change Connection Profile screen Select COMMIT in the Connection Profile screen and press Return Your changes become effective for the specified Connection Profile Power interruptions Netopia 4000 Series routers use NTP updates to set the correct time Consequently the starting time after a power cycle whether from power failure or deliberately switching power off and on is in the year 1904 This could invalidate some keys that would otherwise be valid To prevent this if the system time is before the year 2000 all keys are considered valid regardless of their specified date and time ranges IP Setup 6 17 IP Address Serving ma 2 adaress p SENE i har Men Configuration Serving e Serve Dynamic WAN Clients
91. A and control when the SA will expire and become invalid SA Lifetime seconds specifies the duration in seconds for which the SA will remain valid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer values between O and 2432 1 The default value is 28 800 seconds 1 hour The value zero specifies the absence of an elapsed time lifetime SA Lifetime Kilobytes specifies the maximum number of kilobytes of data that may be secured encrypted decrypted or authenticated using the SA before it expires and becomes invalid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer values between O and 2432 1 The default value is O Kilobytes The value zero specifies the absence of a secured data lifetime Note It is invalid to set both lifetime values to zero This condition is not enforced by the console in order to avoid order dependencies when configuring the items but rather is enforced at runtime and will cause the IPsec profile to assume the defaults Perfect Forward Secrecy toggles whether or not Perfect Forward Secrecy will be used Enabling Perfect Forward Secrecy the default causes IKE to perform a new Diffie Hellman exchange with each Phase 2 re key Because the additional Diffie Hellman exchanges required for Perfect Forward Secrecy introduce additional overhead it may be good to disable Perfect Forward Secrecy when security does not require it Dead Peer Detection toggles whether or not the Router will dete
92. AT Map List Easy PAT NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 173 167 8 10 Remote IP Mask 255 255 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options e Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel Encryption Support Encryption is a method for altering user data into a form that is unusable by anyone other than the intended recipient The recipient must have the means to decrypt the data to render it usable to them The encryption process protects the data by making it difficult for any third party to get at the original data Netopia PPTP is fully compatible with Microsoft Point to Point Encryption MPPE data encryption for user data transfer over the PPTP tunnel Microsoft Windows NT Server provides MPPE encryption capability only when Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol MS CHAP is enabled Netopia complies with this feature to allow MPPE only when MS CHAP is negotiated MS CHAP and MPPE are user selectable options in the PPTP Tunnel Options screen If either the client or the server side specifies encryption then encryption becomes mandatory for both Netopia s ATMP implementation supports Data Encryption Standard DES data encryption for user data transfer over the ATMP tunnel between two Netopia Routers The encryption option none or DES is a selectable option in the ATMP Tunnel Options screen 4 18 Firmware
93. Adding a scheduled connection To add a new scheduled connection select Add Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen and press Return The Add Scheduled Connection screen appears Add Scheduled Connection Scheduled Connection Enable On How Often Weekly Schedule Type Forced Set Weekly Schedule Use Connection Profile ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION CANCEL Scheduled Connections dial remote Networks on a Weekly or Once Only basis Follow these steps to configure the new scheduled connection e To activate the connection select Scheduled Connection Enable and toggle it to On You can make the scheduled connection inactive by toggling Scheduled Connection Enable to Off e Decide how often the connection should take place by selecting How Often and choosing Weekly or Once Only from the pop up menu e The Schedule Type allows you to set the exact weekly schedule or once only schedule Options are e Forced Up meaning that this connection will be maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line e Forced Down meaning that this connection will be torn down or blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line e Demand Allowed meaning that this schedule will permit a demand call on the line 2 18 Firmware User Guide e Demand Blocked meaning that this schedule will prevent a demand call on the line e Periodic meaning that the connection is retried several times during the scheduled ti
94. Configure Address Serving DHCP BOOTP etc here Now you can enter the IP address es of your remote DHCP server s such as might be located in your company s corporate headquarters Each time you enter an IP address and press Return an additional field appears You can enter up to four DHCP server addresses In the example above DHCP requests from clients on the LAN will be relayed to the DHCP servers at IP addresses 10 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 and 30 1 1 1 Note The remote DHCP server s to which the Netopia Router is relaying DHCP requests must be capable of servicing relayed requests Not all DHCP servers support this feature For example the DHCP server in the Netopia Router does not The DHCP server s to which the Netopia Router is relaying DHCP requests must be configured with one or more address pools that are within the Netopia Router s primary Ethernet LAN subnet There is no mechanism for DHCP clients to receive an address on a secondary subnet via a relayed DHCP request Connection Profiles Since you will probably only have a single connection to your ISP over the DSL link you may not need to create multiple connection profiles Additional profiles may be useful for creating VPNs Connection Profiles define the line and networking protocols necessary for the gateway to make a remote connection A connection profile is like an address book entry describing how the gateway is to get to a remote site or how to recognize and
95. DES uses a 56 bit key The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers IPSec DES encryption over the VPN tunnel e Ascend Tunnel Management Protocol ATMP is the protocol that is implemented in many Ascend gateways ATMP is a simple protocol for connecting nodes and or networks together over the Internet via a tunnel ATMP encapsulates IP or other user data without PPP headers within General Routing Encapsulation GRE protocol over IP ATMP is more efficient than PPTP for network to network tunnels When used to initiate the tunnelled connection the Router is called a PPTP Access Concentrator PAC in PPTP language or a foreign agent in ATMP language When used to answer the tunnelled connection the Netopia Router is called a PPTP Network Server PNS in PPTP language or a home agent in ATMP language In either case the Netopia Router wraps or encapsulates information that one end of the tunnel exchanges with the other in a wrapper called General Routing Encapsulation GRE at one end of the tunnel and unwraps or decapsulates it at the other end Configuring the Netopia Router for use with the different protocols is done through the Telnet based menu screens Each type is described in its own section e About PPTP Tunnels on page 4 4 e About IPsec Tunnels on page 4 7 e About L2TP Tunnels on page 4 8 e About GRE Tunnels on page 4 11 e About ATMP Tunnels on page 4 15 Your configuration depends on which protocol you and th
96. Domain Name Receive RIP Transmit RIP Static Routes IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen For more information on IP Setup see the IP Setup on page 6 2 Note Backup and Recovery have resolutions of five seconds This is how often the gateway evaluates the state of the connections and makes decisions Line Backup 7 17 Backup ManagemenwStatistics If backup is enabled the Statistics amp Logs menu offers a Backup Management Statistics option To view Backup Management Statistics from the Main Menu select Statistics amp Logs then Backup Management Statistics and press Return Main ea Backup Management Menu I Statistics amp Logs Statistics The Backup Management Statistics screen appears Backup Management Statistics Current Gateway Primary Backup State Primary Port Failure in Progress Reason Loss of Layer 1 Time Since Detection 0 12 Switchover Time 2 00 FORCE RECOVERY e Current Gateway is a display only field that shows which port is currently in operation e Backup State is a display only field that shows the current state of Backup or Recovery e Reason becomes visible when a failure of or recovery to the Primary interface is in progress During backup the following reasons may appear Loss of
97. ION North America Only For use only with a CSA Certified or UL Listed Limited Power Source or Class 2 power supply rated 12Vdc 1 5A Sweden Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag nar den ansluts till ett n tverk Norway Apparatet ma kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt Technical Specifications and Safety Information D 5 USB powered models For Use with Listed I T E Only Telecommunication installation cautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak FCC Part 68 Information FCC Requirements 1 The Federal Communications Commission FCC has established Rules which permit this device to be directly connected to the telephone network Standardized jacks are used for these connections This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin phones If this device is malfunctioning it may also be causing harm to the telephone network this device should be disconnected until the source of the prob
98. IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare Source Port ID Dest Port Compare Dest Port ID Established TCP Conns Only Yes No Compare 0 Equal 1723 No Select Input Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Change Input Filter 2 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type 4 30 Firmware User Guide In the Display Change Filter Set screen select Display Change Output Filter Display Change Output Filter screen 1723 Yes Yes Yes Yes Select Output Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 1 screen set the Protocol Type and Destination Port information as shown below Change Output Filter 1 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 5150 Select Output Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Change Output Filter 2 Enabled Yes Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 31 Windows Networking Broadcasts Netopia firmware
99. Inspection Options Enable and configure stateful inspection on a WAN interface IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers NAT Options Stateful Inspection Enabled No Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Return Enter to select lt among between gt Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here When you create or modify a Connection Profile the IP Profile Parameters screen allows you to enable Stateful Inspection on that profile by toggling Stateful Inspection Enabled to Yes By default this is turned off No If you enable Stateful Inspection the Stateful Inspection Options field appears WAN and System Configuration 2 25 IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled No IP Addressing Numbered Stateful Inspection Enabled _ Stateful Inspection Options Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Select Stateful Inspection Options and press Return The Stateful Inspection Parameters screen appears Stateful Inspection Parameters Max TCP Sequence Number Difference Enable default mapping to router Deny Fragmented Packets Exposed Address List Enter max all
100. List and pressing Return The Add Exposed Address List screen appears Add Exposed Address List Exposed Address List Name my xposed addr list Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Add Edit or delete exposed addresses options are active only if NAT is disabled on an WAN interface The hosts specified in exposed addresses will be allowed to receive inbound traffic even if there is no corresponding outbound traffic Change Exposed Address Range my _xposed_list First Exposed Address 192 168 1 10 Last Exposed Address Protocol TCP and UDP TCP Port Start UDP Port End CHANGE EXPOSED ADDRESS RANGE Start Address Start IP Address of the exposed host range End Address End IP Address of the exposed host range 2 28 Firmware User Guide e Protocol Select the Protocol of the traffic to be allowed to the host range from the pull down menu Options are Any TCP UDP or TCP UDP e Start Port Start port of the range to be allowed to the host range The acceptable range is from 1 65535 End Port Protocol of the traffic to be allowed to the host range The acceptable range is from 1 65535 You can edit or delete exposed address lists by selecting Show Change Exposed Address List or Delete Exposed Address List A list of previously configured exposed addresses appears Add Exposed Address List Exposed Address Range Protocol 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 12 TCP and UDP
101. Loading an incorrect firmware version can permanently damage the unit Do not manually power down or reset the Router while it is automatically resetting or it could be damaged e If you choose to download the firmware the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading Firmware The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Downloading configuration files The Router can be configured by downloading a configuration file using TFTP Once downloaded the file reconfigures all of the gateway s parameters To download a configuration file follow these steps Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located 10 8 Firmware User Guide e Select Config File Name and enter the name of the file you will download The name of the file is available from the site where the server is located You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for example bigroot config myfile e Select GET CONFIG FROM SERVER and press Return You will see the following dialog box e Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file The system will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new configuration into effect e If you choose to download the configuration file the TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle
102. NETOPIA FIRMWARE USER GUIDE 3300 ENT ENTERPRISE SERIES NETOPIA FIRMWARE VERSION 8 4 netopla BROADBAND WITHOUT BOUNDARIES Copyright Copyright 2004 Netopia Inc Netopia and the Netopia logo are registered trademarks belonging to Netopia Inc registered U S Patent and Trademark Office Broadband Without Boundaries and 3 D Reach are trademarks belonging to Netopia Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners All rights reserved Netopia Inc 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville CA 94608 U S A Part Number Netopia part number 6161196 00 01 Contents iii Contents Chapter 1 Introduction ccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 1 1 What s NOW IM GA sounaran a 1 1 Telnet based Management ccscsescssceseseceseneseeenesenenes 1 2 Netopia Telnet MENUS waccssesdess iscorsdeccaciauerseencananadeaweucmenads 1 2 Netopia Model S ssis E 1 3 Sereen GIMETONCES corosar anaa Ra 1 3 Connecting through a Telnet SeSSION csscssssseeeeenees 1 3 Configuring Telnet SOftWAIE csccecesccsseseeerenees 1 4 Navigating through the Telnet SCreens scssceseseeeseeees 1 4 Chapter 2 WAN and System Configuration 2 c0sseeseeeee 2 1 WAN CoOnfSUratlOMcorcscceccncciseeesusdateasdudseecitaanededataaderaieie 2 1 WAN Ethernet Configuration screen cscceeeeeenes 2 2 ADSL Line Configuration screen ccccseeeeeneeneenes 2 4 Creati
103. Name sam net Password KKKK Data Encryption DES Key String Initiate Connections Yes On Demand Yes Idle Timeout seconds 300 Note An ATMP tunnel cannot be assigned a dynamic IP address by the remote server as in a PPP connection When you define an ATMP tunnel profile the Local WAN IP Address assigned in the IP Profile Parameters screen must be the true IP address not 0 0 0 0 if NAT is enabled ATMP Partner IP Address specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel When unspecified the Router can not initiate tunnels i e act as a foreign agent for this profile it can only accept tunnel requests as a home agent When you specify the ATMP Partner IP Address and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote IP Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters you can specify the route Tunnel Via Gateway by which the Router partner is reached If you do not specify the ATMP Partner IP Address the Router will use the default gateway to reach the partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidden If the partner should be reached via an alternate port i e the LAN instead of the WAN the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this path to be resolved e You can specify a Network Name When the tunnel partner is another Netopia Router this name may be used to match against a Connection Profile When the partner is an Ascend gateway in Gateway mode then Network Name is used by the Ascend gateway to match a g
104. Netopia Routers support the more secure Tunnel mode Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers IPsec 3DES encryption over the VPN tunnel DES stands for Data Encryption Standard a popular symmetric key encryption method DES uses a 56 bit key Netopia Routers offer IPsec 3DES triple DES encryption as a standard option Some models support built in hardware acceleration of 3DES encryption at line speeds Internet Key Exchange IKE is an authentication and encryption key management protocol used in conjunction with the IPsec standard IPsec key management offers a wide variety of options which are explained in Chapter 5 Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 4 8 Firmware User Guide About L2TP Tunnels L2TP stands for Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol an extension to the PPP protocol L2TP combines features of two other tunneling protocols PPTP and L2F Like PPTP L2TP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles It is not an option in device or link configuration screens as L2TP is not a native encapsulation Consequently the Easy Setup Profile does not offer L2TP datalink encapsulation See the Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 9 for information on creating Connection Profiles L2TP configuration To define an L2TP tunnel navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration Profile Add Connection Profile
105. P 10 0 0 141 255 255 255 128 ISP Network Remote Sub 255 255 255 0 Remote IP 192 168 1 129 Gateway 10 0 0 1 Remote Sub Router A Static Route 255 255 255 128 IP Address 10 0 0 1 192 168 1 128 network Gateway 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask pie ete wee Usable IP Addresses 255 255 255 0 168 1 2 via gateway available to Customer Site A Usable IP Addresses available to 192 168 1 1 gt Customer Site A 192 168 1 1 gt 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 126 Customer Site B PC 2 Router B IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 130 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Remote IP 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 128 Remote Sub 255 255 255 128 Gateway 192 168 1 2 Usable IP Addresses available to Customer Site B 192 168 1 129 gt 192 168 1 254 Gateway 192 168 1 129 Understanding IP Addressing B 5 Background The IP addresses and routing configurations for the devices shown in the diagram are outlined below In addition each individual field and its meaning are described The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields define the IP address and subnet mask of the device s Ethernet connection to the network while the Remote IP and Remote Sub fields describe the IP address and subnet mask of the remote gateway This information is entered in the connection profile of the Router The Router field describes the
106. Profile Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 2 Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Underlying Encapsulation Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary When you define a Connection Profile as using GRE by selecting GRE as the Encapsulation Type and then select Encapsulation Options the GRE Tunnel Options screen appears 4 12 Firmware User Guide GRE Tunnel Options GRE Partner IP Address 173 167 8 134 Send Checksums No Sequence Datagrams No Key 0 Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX e Enter a GRE Partner IP Address in standard dotted quad format to specify the address of the other end of the tunnel e You can optionally toggle Send Checksums to Yes to verify that no data corruption or loss is incurred in transmission Ordinarily it is not necessary to send checksums and you can leave the default No Sequence Datagrams can also be left at the default No unless you are otherwise instructed Datagram sequencing is mainly needed if compression is being used e You can enter a 32 bit Key of up to 10 digits numbers only The receiver can use this key to identify the source of the packet The key is a way to match a packet to a tunnel connection If you choose to enter a key be sure that both tunnel endpoints configurations have matching keys If you enter a zero 0 the key field is disabled e
107. Psec tunnel The remainder of the screen allows you to configure the IKE Phase 2 parameters that control the contents of the single IKE Phase 2 proposal sent by the Router These same items specify the values that must be offered by one of the remote peer s proposals The Encapsulation pop up menu allows you to select what IPsec encapsulations will be used ESP only the default AH only or AH ESP both AH and ESP An AH Authentication Transform pop up menu which is visible only if you have selected AH or AH ESP encapsulation allows you to specify the type of AH authentication HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA1 96 The ESP Encryption Transform pop up menu which is visible only if you have selected ESP or AH ESP encapsulation allows you to specify the type of ESP encryption DES 3DES or NULL no encryption Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 11 The ESP Authentication Transform pop up menu which is visible only if you have selected ESP or AH ESP encapsulation allows you to specify the type of ESP authentication None HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA1 96 Advanced IPsec Options If you select Advanced IPsec Options the Advanced IPsec Options screen appears Advanced IPsec Options SA Lifetime seconds 28800 SA Lifetime Kbytes 0 Perfect Forward Secrecy Yes Dead Peer Detection No Maximum Packet Size This screen allows you to specify the lifetime associated with each IPsec Security Association S
108. Secondary Domain Name Server Domain Name RIP Options Multicast Forwarding Static Routes IP Address Serving Select RIP Options The Ethernet LAN RIP Options screen appears Receive RIP Transmit RIP Both vl and v2 v2 MD5 Authentication Select Receive RIP and from the pull down menu choose v2 MD5 Authentication 6 12 Firmware User Guide Ethernet LAN RIP Options Receive RIP v2 MD5 Authentication Transmit RIP off RIP v2 Authentication Keys e You can also select Transmit RIP and choose v2 MD5 broadcast or v2 MD5 multicast from the pull down menu Ethernet LAN RIP Options Receive RIP Transmit RIP RIP v2 Authentication Keys v2 broadcast v2 multicast v2 MD5 broadcast v2 MD5 multicast RIP v2 Authentication Keys is visible only if v2 MD5 Authentication is enabled for either Receive or Transmit RIP Note e All of the changes on this menu require a reboot This is unique to the Ethernet LAN RIP changes on all other interfaces are immediately effective e If you set the RIP Receive option to Both v1 and v2 the interface will ignore authenticated RIP packets since authenticated v1 packets do not exist Only v2 packets can be authenticated Select RIP v2 Authentication Keys The RIP v2 Authentication Keys screen appears RIP v2 Authentication Keys Display Change Key Add Key Delete Key Adding a key Select Add Key The
109. Server Private IP Address 192 168 1 254 Public IP Address 206 1 1 1 CHANGE NAT SERVER You can make changes to the server s service and port or internal or external address Select CHANGE NAT SERVER and press Return Your changes take effect and you are returned to the Show Change NAT Server List screen Deleting a server To delete a server from the list select Delete Server from the Show Change NAT Server List menu and press Return 3 20 Firmware User Guide A pop up menu lists your configured servers Select the one you want to delete and press Return A dialog box asks you to confirm your choice Show Change NAT Server List Internal Address External Address Port Are you sure you want to delete this Server CONTINUE Choose CONTINUE and press Return The server is deleted from the list Multiple Network Address Translation 3 21 Binding Map Lists and Server Lists Once you have created your map lists and server lists for most Netopia Router models you must bind them to a profile either a Connection Profile or the Default Profile You do this in one of the following screens e the IP profile parameters screen see below of the Connection Profile configuration menu e the IP Parameters WAN Default Profile screen see page 3 23 of the Default Profile configuration menu e the Binding Map Lists and Server Lists screen see page 3 21 IP profile parameters To bind a map list to a Connection Profile
110. Up Networking for VPN on page 4 21 e Allowing VPNs through a Firewall on page 4 24 e Windows Networking Broadcasts on page 4 31 Overview When you make a long distance telephone call from your home to a relative far away you are creating a private network You can hold a conversation and exchange information about the happenings on opposite sides of the state or the continent that you are mutually interested in When your next door neighbor picks up the phone to call her daughter at college at the same time you are talking to your relatives your calls don t overlap but each is separate and private Neither house has a direct wire to the places they call Both share the same lines on the telephone poles or underground on the street These calls are virtual private networks Virtual because they appear to be direct connections between the calling and answering parties even though they travel over the public wires and switches of the phone company private because neither pair of calling and answering parties interacts with the other and networks because they exchange information Computers can do the same thing it s called Virtual Private Networks VPNs Equipped with a Netopia Router a single computer or private network LAN can establish a private connection with another computer or private network over the public network Internet 4 2 Firmware User Guide Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 can be used in VPNs either to initiate
111. WINIPCFG program a command line program executable from the DOS prompt or from the START RUN menu on a Windows based computer Windows 3 1 workstation MSTCP Version 3 114 e The Win3 1 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour The Win3 1 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the user exits Windows and goes to DOS The lease can be manually expired by typing IRCONFIG RELEASE from a DOS window within Windows or from the DOS prompt Macintosh workstation Open Transport Version 1 1 or later The Mac workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour e The Mac workstation relinquishes its address upon shutdown in all but one case If the TCP IP control panel is set to initialize at startup and no IP services are used or the TCP IP control panel is not opened the DHCP address will NOT be relinquished upon shutdown However if the TCP IP control panel is opened or if an IP application is used the Mac WILL relinquish the lease upon shutdown e Ifthe TCP IP control panel is set to acquire an address only when needed therefore a TCP IP application must have been launched to obtain a lease the Mac WILL relinquish its lease upon shutdown every time Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 DHCP server characteristics e The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 ignores any lease time associated with a DHCP request and automatically issues the DHCP address lease for one hour The number of devices a Router
112. a Link Options the PPTP Tunnel Options screen appears PPTP Tunnel Options PPTP Partner IP Address 173 167 8 134 Tunnel Via Gateway 0 0 0 0 Authentication CHAP Data Compression None Send Host name tony Send Password KEKE Receive Host name kimba Receive Password KKK Initiate Connections Yes On Demand Yes Optional Windows NT Domain Name Idle Timeout seconds Enter the PPTP Partner IP Address This specifies the address of the other end of the tunnel If you do not specify the PPTP Partner IP Address the Router cannot initiate tunnels i e act as a PPTP Access Concentrator PAC for this profile It can only accept tunnel requests as a PPTP Network Server PNS e If you specify the PPTP Partner IP Address and the address is in the same subnet as the Remote IP Address you specified in the IP Profile Parameters the Tunnel Via Gateway option becomes visible You can enter the address by which the Router partner is reached If you do not specify the PPTP Partner IP Address the Router will use the default gateway to reach the partner and the Tunnel Via Gateway field is hidden If the partner should be reached via an alternate port i e the LAN instead of the WAN the Tunnel Via Gateway field allows this path to be resolved From the pop up menu select an Authentication protocol for the PPP connection Options are PAP CHAP or MS CHAP The default is PAP The authentication protocol must be the same on
113. abel identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operation and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction D 4 Firmware User Guide Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to the certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves b
114. abled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID Established TCP Conns Only No ADD THIS FILTER NOW 2 To make the filter active in the filter set select Enabled and toggle it to Yes If Enabled is toggled to No the filter can still exist in the filter set but it will have no effect 9 28 Firmware User Guide 3 4 10 11 If you want the filter to forward packets that match its criteria to the destination IP address select Forward and toggle it to Yes If Forward is toggled to No packets matching the filter s criteria will be discarded Select Source IP Address and enter the source IP address this filter will match on You can enter a subnet or a host address Select Source IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the source IP address This allows you to further modify the way the filter will match on the source address Enter 0 0 0 0 to force the filter to match on all source IP addresses or enter 255 255 255 255 to match the source IP address exclusively Select Dest IP Address and enter the destination IP address this filter will match on You can enter a subnet or a host address Select Dest IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the destination IP address This allows you to further modify the way the filter will match on
115. acOS or the Network Preference Pane of System Preferences Mac OS X Once configured the passthrough host s DHCP leases will be shortened to two minutes This allows for timely updates of the host s IP address which will be a private IP address before the WAN connection is established After the WAN connection is established and has an address the passthrough host can renew its DHCP address binding to acquire the WAN IP address 3 30 Firmware User Guide A restriction Since both the router and the passthrough host will use same IP address new sessions that conflict with existing sessions will be rejected by the router For example Suppose you are a teleworker using an IPSec tunnel from the router and from the passthrough host Both tunnels go to the same remote endpoint such as the VPN access concentrator at your employer s office In this case the first one to start the IPSec traffic will be allowed the second one since from the WAN it s indistinguishable will fail Multiple Network Address Translation 3 31 MultiNAT Configuration Example To help you understand a typical MultiNAT configuration this section describes an example of the type of configuration you may want to implement on your site The values shown are for example purposes only Make your own appropriate substitutions A typical DSL service from an ISP might include five user addresses Without PAT you might be able to attach only five IP hosts Using simpl
116. ail over purposes choose Automatic Select Requires Failure of minutes and enter the number of minutes that the system should wait before it assumes that a connection failure has occurred After that period the system would switch to backup mode and connect via the modem Note Backup and Recovery have resolutions of five seconds This is how often the router evaluates the state of the connections and makes decisions Select Ping Host Name or IP Address and enter an IP address or resolvable DNS name that the router will ping This is an optional item that is particularly useful for testing if the remote end of a VPN connection Line Backup 7 11 has gone down Should this address become unreachable the router will treat this as a loss of connectivity and begin the backup timer This loss is a Layer 2 loss Note For best results enter an IP address and not a host name If a host name is used it may not be resolvable and may keep the interface down Set the Ping Host Name or IP Address to the router s Default Gateway or other reliable IP address elsewhere on the backbone for example a DNS server This will ensure that the router will initiate backup connection on loss of Layer 3 Note If you want the router to initiate the backup connection on loss of Layer 1 or 2 only Physical or Data link Layer leave Ping Host Name or IP Address blank Do not use 0 0 0 0 in this field Hit the space bar or Delete key to CLEAR the
117. ained manually Each static route acts as a pointer that tells the Router how to reach a particular network However static routes are used only if they appear in the IP routing table which contains all of the routes used by the Router see IP Routing Table on page 8 7 Static routes are helpful in situations where a route to a network must be used and other means of finding the route are unavailable For example static routes are useful when you cannot rely on RIP To go to the Static Routes screen select Static Routes in the IP Setup screen and press Return IP Setup 6 7 The Static Routes screen will appear Static Routes Display Change Static Route Add Static Route Delete Static Route Configure View Delete Static Routes from this and the following Screens Viewing static routes To display a view only table of static routes select Display Change Static Route The table shown below will appear 163 176 8 1 Select a Static Route to modify The table has the following columns Dest Network The network IP address of the destination network 6 8 Firmware User Guide Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the destination network Next Gateway The IP address of the gateway that will be used to reach the destination network Priority An indication of whether the Router will use the static route when it conflicts with information received from RIP packets Enabled An indication of
118. alled on the computer you will use to configure the Router 1 4 Firmware User Guide Configuring Telnet software If you are configuring your device using a Telnet session your computer must be running a Telnet software program If you connect a PC with Microsoft Windows you can use a Windows Telnet application or run Telnet from the Start menu Run MEI Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Log Off NJBILL telnet 192 168 1 1 Cancel Browse Shut Down e If you connect a Macintosh computer running Classic Mac OS you can use the NCSA Telnet program supplied on the Netopia CD You install NCSA Telnet by dragging the application from the CD to your hard disk Mac OS X users can use the Terminal application that comes with Mac OS X in the Utilities folder Navigating through the Telnet Screens Use your keyboard to navigate the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 s configuration screens enter and edit information and make choices The following table lists the keys to use to navigate through the Telnet screens To Use These Keys Move through selectable items in a screen or pop up menu Up Down Left and Right Arrow Set a change to a selected item or open a pop up menu of Return or Enter options for a selected item like entering an upgrade key Change a toggle value Yes No On Off Tab Restore an entry or toggle v
119. ally into one or more virtual circuits VCs A virtual circuit may be either a permanent virtual circuit PVC or a switched virtual circuit SVC Netopia Routers support PVCs WAN and System Configuration 2 5 VCs are identified by a Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI A VPI is an 8 bit value between O and 255 inclusive while a VCI is a 16 bit value between O and 65535 inclusive e Circuits support attributes in addition to their VPI and VCI values When configuring a circuit you can specify an optional circuit name of up to 14 characters The circuit name is used only to identify the circuit for management purposes as a convenience to aid in selecting circuits from lists The default circuit name is Circuit lt n gt where lt n gt is some number between one and eight corresponding to the circuit s position in the list of up to eight circuits e You can also individually enable or disable a circuit without deleting it This is useful for temporarily removing a circuit without losing the configured attributes In order to function each circuit must be bound to a Connection Profile or to the Default Profile Among other attributes the profile binding specifies the IP addressing information for use on the circuit Each circuit must be bound to a distinct Connection Profile ATM VPI VCI Autodetection You can bind multiple circuits to the same Connection Profile Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 allows
120. alue to its previous value Esc Move one item up Up arrow or Control K Move one item down Down arrow or Control O Display a dump of the device event log Control E Display a dump of the WAN event log Control F Refresh the screen Control L Introduction 1 5 To help you find your way to particular screens some sections in this guide begin with a graphical path guide similar to the following example i Syst Main ystem Menu Configuration i IP Serup This particular path guide shows how to get to the Network Protocols Setup screens The path guide represents these steps 1 Beginning in the Main Menu select System Configuration and press Return The System Configuration screen appears 2 Select IP Setup and press Return The IP Setup screen appears To go back in this sequence of screens use the Escape key 1 6 Firmware User Guide WAN and System Configuration 2 1 Chapter 2 WAN and System Configuration This chapter describes how to use the Telnet based management screens to access and configure advanced features of your equipment You can customize these features for your individual setup These menus provide a powerful method for experienced users to set up their Router s connection profiles and system configuration This section covers the following topics WAN Configuration on page 2 1 i WAN Ethernet Configuration screen on page 2 2
121. ame and Password for authorization of dial in connections if so configured For CHAP Authentication you enter a Host Name and Secret Unless otherwise instructed you can leave the other defaults unchanged Press Escape Add Connection Profile Profile Name Modem Backup Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type PPP Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Backup Telco Options COMMIT CANCEL Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit Line Backup 7 5 Select IP Profile Parameters The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Unnumbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers NAT Options Stateful Inspection Enabled Local WAN IP Address Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Toggle to Yes if this is a single IP address ISP account Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Unless otherwise instructed accept the defaults except the following e Set Remote IP Address to 127 0 0 2 e Set Remote IP Mask to 255 255 255 0 These allow your ISP to supply your IP address and subnet mask when you connect via dial up Press Escape to return to the Add Connection Profile screen When you chose Backup for the Interface Group Telco Options became visible Select Telco Options The Tel
122. ateway profile When the partner is an Ascend gateway in Gateway mode leave this field blank e You must specify a Password used for authenticating the tunnel Note The Password entry will be the same for both ends of the tunnel e For Netopia to Netopia connections only you can specify a Data Encryption algorithm for the ATMP connection from the pop up menu either DES or None None is the default Note Ascend does not support DES encryption for ATMP tunnels e You must specify a Key String of up to and including 20 characters when DES is selected When encryption is None this field is invisible Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 17 e You can specify that this Router will Initiate Connections acting as a foreign agent Yes or only answer them acting as a home agent No e Tunnels are normally initiated On Demand however you can disable this feature When disabled the tunnel must be manually established through the call management screens e You can specify the Idle Timeout an inactivity timer whose expiration will terminate the tunnel A value of zero disables the timer Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is torn down use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged e Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes N
123. ation with the Trace Route utility In the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen select Trace Route and press Return The Trace Route screen appears Trace Route Host Name or IP Address Maximum Hops 30 Timeout seconds 5 Use Reverse DNS Yes START TRACE ROUTE Enter the IP Address Domain Name of a host Trace route to a network host To trace a route follow these steps 1 Select Host Name or IP Address and enter the name or address of the destination you want to trace 2 Select Maximum Hops to set the maximum number of gateways to count between the Netopia Router and the destination gateway up to the maximum of 64 The default is 30 hops 3 Select Timeout seconds to set when the trace will timeout for each hop up to 10 seconds The default is 3 seconds Utilities and Diagnostics 10 5 4 Select Use Reverse DNS to learn the names of the gateways between the Netopia Router and the destination gateway The default is Yes 5 Select START TRACE ROUTE and press Return A scrolling screen will appear that lists the destination number of hops IP addresses of each hop and DNS names if selected 6 Cancel the trace by pressing Escape Return to the Trace Route screen by pressing Escape twice Telnet Client The Telnet client mode replaces the normal menu mode Telnet sessions can be cascaded that is you can initiate a Telnet client session when using a Telnet console session To activate the Telnet client selec
124. authenticate a remote user connecting to the gateway To create a new Connection Profile you navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select Add Connection Profile Main Menu IP Setup c iit The Add Connection Profile screen appears WAN Configuration Add Connection gt Profile Profile Name Profile Enabled Data Link Encapsulation Data Link Options IP Profile Parameters COMMIT Configure a new Conn Profile Finished Add Connection Profile Profile 1 Yes PPP CANCEL COMMIT or CANCEL to exit 6 31 On a Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles for a total of 16 although only one can be used at a time unless you are using VPNs 1 Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection profile It can be any name you wish For example the name of your ISP 2 Toggle the Profile Enabled value to Yes or No The default is Yes 3 Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears 6 32 Firmware User Guide IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address Local WAN IP Mask Remote IP Address Remote IP Mask Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here 4 Toggle
125. ay mode Initiate Only or Respond Only permit limiting the connection to one way only The SA Use Policy pop up menu specifies the policy that the Router will use to determine which Phase 1 SAs to use when multiple valid Phase 1 SAs are available for transmitting traffic on an IPsec tunnel Because the Router normally re keys prior to the expiration of the current Phase 1 SAs multiple valid Phase 1 SAs may exist during the period of time after the Router has re keyed and established new Phase 1 SAs and the time at which the old Phase 1 SAs expire e Ifyou select Newest SAs Immediately the Router will begin using the newly created Phase 1 SAs immediately after they are negotiated e Ifyou select Old SAs Until Expired the Router will continue using the old Phase 1 SAs until they expire and will begin using the newly created Phase 1 SAs only after the old ones are no longer valid Allow Dangling Phase 2 SAs toggles whether or not Phase 2 SAs are permitted to survive the expiration of the Phase 1 SAs under which they were created Phase 2 SAs dangle when the Phase 1 SA under which they were created expires before they do There is no requirement that the Phase 1 SA exist for the duration of the Phase 2 SA s lifetime but it is convenient because a Delete message may be sent Phase 1 SA Lifetime seconds specifies the duration in seconds for which the SA will remain valid The range of permissible values is the set of non negative integer
126. below Message Description Resolving host name Finding the IP address for the domain name style address Can t resolve host name IP address can t be found for the domain name style address Pinging Ping test is in progress Complete Ping test was completed Cancelled by user Ping test was cancelled manually Destination unreachable from Ping test was able to reach the gateway with IP address w x y z W X Y Z which reported that the test could not reach the final destination Couldn t allocate packet buffer Couldn t proceed with Ping test try again or reset system Couldn t open ICMP port Couldn t proceed with Ping test try again or reset system Packets Out The number of packets sent by the Ping test Packets In The number of return packets received from the target host To be considered on time return packets are expected back before the next packet in the sequence of Ping packets is sent A count of the number of late packets appears in parentheses to the right of the Packets In count In the example that follows a Router is sending Ping packets to another host which responds with return Ping packets Note that the second return Ping packet is considered to be late because it is not received by the Router before the third Ping packet is sent The first and third return Ping packets are on time time send Ping packet 1 Netopia P receive Ping packet 1 host Netopia ag
127. both ends of the tunnel e You can specify a Data Compression algorithm either None or Standard LZS for the PPTP connection Note When the Authentication protocol is MS CHAP compression is set to None and the Data Compression option is hidden e When the authentication protocol is MS CHAP you can specify a Data Encryption algorithm for the PPTP connection Available options are MPPE and None the default For other authentication protocols this option is hidden When MPPE is negotiated the WAN Event History reports that it is negotiated as a CCP compression type This is because the MPPE protocol uses a compression engine even though it is not itself a compression protocol 4 6 Firmware User Guide Note Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports 128 bit strong encryption Unlike MS CHAP version 1 which supports one way authentication MS CHAP version 2 supports mutual authentication between connected gateways and is incompatible with MS CHAP version 1 MS CHAP V1 When you choose MS CHAP as the authentication method for the PPTP tunnel the Netopia Router will start negotiating MS CHAP V2 If the gateway you are connecting to does not support MS CHAP V2 it will fall back to MS CHAP V1 or if the gateway you are connecting to does not support MPPE at all the PPP session will be dropped You can specify a Send Host Name which is used with Send Secret for authenticating with a remote PNS when the profile is used for initiating a
128. c ranges you have defined Add NAT Map my_map Public Address Range Type Name Easy PAT Select p my_first_rang static my_second_range lt lt NEW RANGE gt gt Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to cancel Return Enter to Delete From the list of public ranges you defined select the one that you want to map to the interior range for this mapping and press Return If none of your preconfigured ranges are suitable for this mapping you can select lt lt NEW RANGE gt gt and create a new range If you choose lt lt NEW RANGE gt gt the Add NAT Public Range screen displays and you can create a new public range to be used by this map See Add NAT Public Range on page 3 9 3 12 Firmware User Guide The Add NAT Map screen now displays the range you have assigned Add NAT Map my map First Private Address 192 168 1 1 Last Private Address 192 168 1 254 Use NAT Public Range my_first_range Public Range Type is pat Public Range Start Address is 206 1 1 6 ADD NAT MAP Select ADD NAT MAP and press Return Your mapping is added to your map list Modifying map lists You can make changes to an existing map list after you have created it Since there may be more than one map list you must select which one you are modifying From the Network Address Translation screen select Show Change Map List and press Return Select the map list you want to modify from the pop up menu Network Addres
129. cally from Netopia or from a site maintained by your organization s network administrator The Router ships with an embedded operating system referred to as firmware The firmware governs how the device communicates with your network and the WAN or remote site Firmware updates are periodically posted on the Netopia website To update the gateway s firmware follow these steps e Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located Select Firmware File Name and enter the name of the file you will download The name of the file is available from the site where the server is located You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for example bigroot config myfile Select GET GATEWAY FIRMWARE FROM SERVER and press Return You will see the following dialog box Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia The device will restart when the transfer is complete CONTINUE e Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file or select CONTINUE to download the file The system will reset at the end of the file transfer to put the new firmware into effect While the system resets the LEDs will blink on and off Caution e Be sure the firmware update you load onto your gateway is the correct version for your particular model Some models do not support all firmware versions
130. can serve DHCP to is 512 This is imposed by global limits on the size of the address serving database which is shared by all address serving functions active in the gateway e The Router releases the DHCP address back to the available DHCP address pool exactly one hour after the last heard lease request Some other DHCP implementations may hold on to the lease for an additional time after the lease expired to act as a buffer for variances in clocks between the client and server MaclP serving Macintosh workstation MacTCP or Open Transport Once the Mac workstation requests and receives a valid address the Router actively checks for the workstation s existence once every minute B 8 Firmware User Guide e For a dynamic address the Router releases the address back to the address pool after it has lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 2 minutes e For a static address the Router releases the address back to the address pool after it has lost contact with the Mac workstation for over 20 minutes Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 MacIP server characteristics The Mac workstation uses ATP to both request and receive an address from the Router s MaclIP server Once acquired NBP confirm packets will be sent out every minute from the Router to the Mac workstation Manually distributing IP addresses If you choose to manually distribute IP addresses you must enter each computer s address into its TCP IP stack software Once you manua
131. character passphrase At least 20 is ideal for best security e WEP Alternatively you can provide a level of data security by enabling WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy for encryption of network data You can enable 40 128 or 256 bit WEP Encryption depending on the capability of your client wireless card for IP traffic on your LAN WAN and System Configuration 2 33 Wireless LAN Configuration Enable Wireless Yes SSID 4405 2605 Channel 6 Closed System Open Enable WEP On Automatic Default Key 1 Passphrase Well I stand up next to a mountain Key 1 40b 5ad06701b4 Key 2 128b 80a6ab74749ea5a251011d8979 Key 3 128b e024cb9417a521b0e49e208fef Key 4 40b 46a968d564 Enter a phrase and hit Enter to generate your encryption keys You select a single key for encryption of outbound traffic The WEP enabled client must have an identical key of the same length in the identical slot 1 4 as the Gateway in order to successfully receive and decrypt the traffic Similarly the client also has a default key that it uses to encrypt its transmissions In order for the Gateway to receive the client s data it must likewise have the identical key of the same length in the same slot For simplicity a Gateway and its clients need only enter share and use the first key The pull down menu for enabling WEP offers these settings On Automatic or On Manual On Automatic uses a passphrase to gene
132. ckage matches the first inspector s criteria the package is either rejected or passed on to its destination depending on the first inspector s particular orders In this case the package is never seen by the remaining inspectors packet first filter send to next filter discard delete forward to network If the package does not match the first inspector s criteria it goes to the second inspector and so on You can see that the order of the inspectors in the line is very important For example let s say the first inspector s orders are to send along all packages that come from Rome and the second inspector s orders are to reject all packages that come from France If a package arrives from Rome the first inspector sends it along without allowing the second inspector to see it A package from Paris is ignored by the first inspector rejected by the second inspector and never seen by the others A package from London is ignored by the first two inspectors so it s seen by the third inspector In the same way filter sets apply their filters in a particular order The first filter applied can forward or discard a packet before that packet ever reaches any of the other filters If the first filter can neither forward nor discard the packet because it cannot match any criteria the second filter has a chance to forward or reject it and so on Because of this hierarchical structure each filter is said to
133. co Options screen allows you to set the parameters for the modem connection 7 6 Firmware User Guide Telco Options Dial Dial In Out Dialing Prefix Number to Dial Alternate Site to Dial Dial on Demand Idle Timeout seconds Callback CompuServe Login Enabled e From the Dial pop up menu you can choose whether to Dial Out Only Dial In Only or Dial In Out default e Dialing Prefix If you are connected to a Centrex or PBX phone system that requires you to dial a prefix number such as 9 for an outside line enter it here e You can add the Number to Dial and an Alternate Site to Dial if available e You can toggle Dial on Demand to Yes or No This allows the router to determine whether or not to dial the backup number when there is traffic that needs to be transmitted or received You can set the Idle Timeout seconds to tear down the connection after some specified period of inactivity e You can also toggle Callback to No or Yes In most cases since this is a backup connection you can leave this set to the default No In some cases your service provider or corporate office may use the CompuServe Login protocol If so toggle CompuServe Login Enabled to Yes Otherwise leave the default No When enabled CompuServe Login requires that you enter a CompuServe Host Name a CompuServe User Name and a CompuServe Password These options become visible only if you enable CompuServe Login Pre
134. ct a remote peer being offline 5 12 Firmware User Guide Maximum Packet Size permits you to modify the MTU setting for the tunnel Some ISPs require a setting of e g 1492 or other value The default 1500 is the most common and you usually don t need to change this unless otherwise instructed Accepted values are from 100 1500 This is the starting value that is used for the MTU when the IPSec tunnel is installed It specifies the maximum IP packet length for the encapsulated AH or ESP packets sent by the router The MTU used on the IPSec connection will be automatically adjusted based on the MTU value in any received ICMP can t fragment error messages that correspond to IPSec traffic initiated from the router Normally the MTU only requires manual configuration if the ICMP error messages are blocked or otherwise not received by the router Enhanced Dead Peer Detection Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 adds a new Dead Peer Detection mechanism In previous firmware versions when Dead Peer Detection was enabled a counter would begin in the router when any traffic was sent through the tunnel Determination of a dead peer could take up to eight minutes Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 provides a new Dead Peer Detection mechanism An IPsec IP net interface sends ICMP ping requests to a specific IP address on a Remote Member network The ping is periodic and the reply is expected within a certain amount of time If the ICMP reply does not arrive wi
135. d appears Enter the domain name your network administrator has supplied e You can specify the Idle Timeout an inactivity timer whose expiration will terminate the tunnel A value of zero disables the timer Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is torn down use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged e Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 7 The IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes NAT Map List Easy PAT NAT Server List Easy Servers Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote IP Address 173 167 8 10 Remote IP Mask 255 255 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options e Enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel About IPsec Tunnels IPsec stands for IP Security a set of protocols that supports secure exchange of IP packets at the IP layer IPsec is deployed widely to implement Virtual Private Networks VPNs See Overview on page 4 1 for more information IPsec supports two encryption modes Transport and Tunnel Transport mode encrypts only the data portion payload of each packet but leaves the header untouched The more secure Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the payload On the receiving side an IPsec compliant device decrypts each packet
136. d are not the same Each method of distribution must have its own exclusive range of addresses to draw from IP subnets The IP Subnets screen allows you to configure up to eight Ethernet IP subnets on unlimited user models one primary subnet and up to seven secondary subnets by entering IP address subnet mask pairs IP Subnets IP Address Subnet Mask 192 128 117 162 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note You need not use this screen if you have only a single Ethernet IP subnet In that case you can continue to enter or edit the IP address and subnet mask for the single subnet on the IP Setup screen This screen displays up to eight rows of two editable columns preceded by a row number between one and eight If you have eight subnets configured there will be eight rows on this screen Otherwise there will be one more row than the number of configured subnets The last row will have the value 0 0 0 0 in both the IP address and subnet mask fields to indicate that you can edit the values in this row to configure an additional subnet All eight row labels are always visible regardless of the number of subnets configured To add an IP subnet enter the Router s IP address on the subnet in the IP Address field in a particular row and the subnet mask for the subnet in the Subnet Mask field in that row IP Setup 6 5 For example IP Subnets IP Address Subnet Mask 192 128 117 162 255 255 255 0 192 128 152 162 255 255 0 0
137. d map list For the purpose of this example you can just alter this range and list Change NAT Public Range Range Name Easy PAT Range Type pat Public Address 206 1 1 6 First Public Port Last Public Port CHANGE NAT PUBLIC RANGE Select CHANGE NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return This returns you to the Network Address Translation screen Select Add Public Range and press Return Type a name for this static range as shown below Enter the first and last public addresses your ISP assigned in their respective fields as shown The first five public IP addresses 206 1 1 1 206 1 1 5 in this example are statically mapped to the first five corresponding private IP addresses 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 Add NAT Public Range Range Name Static Range Type static First Public Address 206 1 1 1 Last Public Address 206 1 1 5 ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE Return Enter to commit changes 3 34 Firmware User Guide Select ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return You are returned to the Network Address Translation screen Next select Show Change Map List and choose Easy PAT List Select Add Map The Add NAT Map screen appears Now the name Easy PAT List is a misnomer since it has a static map included in its list Enter in 192 168 1 1 for the First Private Address and 192 168 1 5 for the Last Private Address Add NAT Map Easy PAT List First Private Address 192 168 1 1 Last Private Address 192 168 1 5 Use NAT P
138. d with the pseudo client identifier This is normally the last address served to the client e Otherwise the Netopia will select the least recently used available address starting from the first address in the first pool and ending with the last address in the last pool Note The address serving pools on this screen are tied to the IP subnets configured on the IP Subnets screen Changes to the IP Subnets screen may affect this screen In particular deleting a subnet on the IP Subnets screen will delete the corresponding address serving pool if any on this screen DHCP NetBIOS Options If your network uses NetBIOS you can enable the Router to use DHCP to distribute NetBIOS information NetBIOS stands for Network Basic Input Output System It is a layer of software originally developed by IBM and Sytek to link a network operating system with specific hardware NetBIOS has been adopted as an industry standard It offers LAN applications a variety of hooks to carry out inter application communications and data transfer Essentially NetBIOS is a way for application programs to talk to the network To run an application that works with NetBIOS a non IBM network operating system or network interface card must offer a NetBIOS emulator Many vendors either provide a version of NetBIOS to interface with their hardware or emulate its transport layer communications services in their network products A NetBIOS emulator is a program provided b
139. ddr 199 211 211 17 e Source IP address mask 255 255 255 255 Dest IP Addr 0 0 0 0 e Destination IP address mask 0 0 0 0 3 Using the tables on page 9 19 find the destination port and protocol numbers the oca Telnet port e Proto TCP or 6 e D Port 23 4 The filter should be enabled and instructed to block the Telnet packets containing the source address shown in step 2 On Yes Fwd No This four step process is how we produced the following filter from the original rule 192 211 211 17 0 0 0 0 Filtering example 2 Suppose a filter is configured to block all incoming IP packets with the source IP address of 200 233 14 0 regardless of the type of connection or its destination The filter would look like this Security 9 23 This filter blocks any packets coming from a remote network with the IP network address 200 233 14 0 The O at the end of the address signifies any host on the class C IP network 200 233 14 0 If for example the filter is applied to a packet with the source IP address 200 233 14 5 it will block it In this case the mask which does not appear in the table must be set to 255 255 255 0 This way all packets with a source address of 200 233 14 x will be matched correctly no matter what the final address byte is Note The protocol attribute for this filter is O by default This tells the filter to ignore the IP protocol or type of IP packet Design guidelines Careful thoug
140. de IP address translation for private LAN computers The public WAN IP is assigned and reused on a LAN computer DHCP address serving can automatically serve the WAN IP address to a LAN computer When DHCP is used for addressing the designated passthrough PC the acquired or configured WAN address is passed to DHCP which will dynamically configure a single servable address subnet and reserve the address for the configured MAC address This dynamic subnet configuration is based on the local and remote WAN address and subnet mask If the WAN interface does not have a suitable subnet mask that is usable for example when using PPP or PPPoE the DHCP subnet configuration will default to a class C subnet mask Globally only one dynamically configured DHCP subnet is available If you configure multiple Connection Profiles to use IP Passthrough s DHCP option when any of these profiles is established the dynamic DHCP configuration will be overwritten In the case of an Ethernet WAN router the IP passthrough configuration is located in the WAN Ethernet Configuration menu For all other routers it is located in the Connection Profiles IP Profile Parameters The WAN Ethernet Configuration screen found under the WAN Configuration menu WAN Setup screen appears as shown WAN Ethernet Configuration Address Translation Enabled Yes Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers NAT Options State
141. defined B 8 DHCP Lease 6 18 DHCP NetBIOS options 6 21 DHCP Relay Agent 6 28 display static routes 6 7 distributing IP addresses B 5 downloading configuration files 10 7 with TFTP 10 7 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 6 17 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP Dynamic WAN 6 17 E Easy Setup navigating 1 4 encryption 4 2 4 7 4 17 5 1 event history device 8 5 WAN 8 5 Exposed Addresses 2 27 Index 2 F filter parts 9 19 parts of 9 19 filter priority 9 18 filter set adding 9 25 display 9 21 filter sets adding 9 25 defined 9 17 deleting 9 29 disadvantages 9 23 sample Basic Firewall 9 29 using 9 24 filtering example 1 9 22 filters actions a filter can take 9 18 adding to a filter set 9 26 defined 9 17 deleting 9 29 disadvantages of 9 23 input 9 26 modifying 9 28 output 9 26 using 9 23 9 24 viewing 9 28 firewall 9 29 firmware files updating with TFTP 10 7 FTP sessions 9 32 G general statistics 8 7 Generic Routing Encapsulation 4 11 GRE 4 11 H how to reach us A 4 l IKE 5 1 input filter 3 9 30 input filters 1 and 2 9 30 input filters 4 and 5 9 30 Internet addresses see IP addresses Internet Key Exchange 5 1 Internet Key Exchange IKE 4 7 5 1 Internet Protocol IP 6 1 IP address serving 6 17 IP addresses B 1 about B 1 distributing B 5 distribution rules B 10 static B 8 IP setup 6 2 IP trap receivers deleting 8 13 modifying 8 13 setting 8 13 viewing 8 13 IPsec 4 2 4 7 5 1 L
142. defined in the netopia sysParams table and sysObjectID defined in the mib 2 system table values have been included in this trap The SNMP agent IP address is present in every trap This information will allow the NetOctopus tool to uniquely identify the device sending the trap A single configuration item is required for heartbeat traps the time interval between traps Permitted values are O 65535 minutes A value of zero the default means the trap is disabled Whenever the interval value is set to a non zero number a trap is sent immediately and the new or same interval value takes effect This MIB is available by anonymous ftp from the Netopia ftp server MIBs are available in a variety of formats Load this MIB into your SNMP management software Follow the instructions included with your SNMP manager on how to load MIBs The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports the following management information base MIB documents MIB II RFC 1213 Interface MIB RFC 1229 Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 e Netopia MIB SNMP v2 Traps SNMP v2 MIB RFC1907 v2 traps only NPAV2TRAP MIB Netopia specific ATM ATM TC RFC2514 ATM MIB RFC2515 ADSL ADSL MIB RFC2662 You can obtain the latest SNMP MIBs from the Netopia anonymous FTP server FTP to ftp netopia com pub router snmpinfo Load these MIBs into your SNMP management software in the order they are listed here Follow the instructions included with your SNMP manager on
143. dress the other fields are hidden Select COMMIT and press Return to add the configuration This returns you to the IP Profile Parameters screen Select COMMIT and press Return in the IP Profile Parameters screen This returns you to the Change Connection Profile screen Select COMMIT and press Return in the Change Connection Profile screen Note e Any two IPsec tunnels differ only by the local remote networks they are intended to reach they have the same encryption policy which is derived from the base profile e The feature is limited to 8 networks per tunnel If you return to the IP Profile Parameters screen two new fields are displayed IP Profile Parameters Remote Tunnel Endpoint 0 0 0 0 Display Change Network Delete Network Address Translation Enabled Filter Set lt lt None gt gt Remove Filter Set Advanced IP Profile Options COMMIT CANCEL Enter the IP Address or hostname of the remote tunnel endpoint e Display Change Network allows you to make changes to existing network configurations you have made If you select Display Change Network a list of your configured networks displays 5 16 Firmware User Guide Display Change Network Configuration Local Members Net Type Start Address Size SCROLL UP SUBNET 192 168 2 1 192 168 1 0 SUBNET 10 0 1 1 SUBNET 10 0 0 1 HOST 163 176 91 101 HOST 163 176 91 100 RANGE 163 176 30 222 21 RANGE 163 176 91 100 100 Scroll down and up with
144. e IKE Profile 2 1 Profile Arthropods Anthropoids e e Anopheles Albigensians Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Selecting Display Change IKE Phase 1 Profile and choosing an IKE phase 1 profile name from the pop up list displays the Change IKE Phase 1 Profile screen This screen is identical to the Add IKE Phase 1 Profile screen shown above 5 8 Firmware User Guide Selecting Delete IKE Phase 1 Profile and choosing an IKE phase 1 profile name from the pop up list displays a confirmation alert asking you to confirm that you really want to delete the specified IKE phase 1 profile IPsec Configuration IKE Phasel Profile Displayt Add IKE Netopia Are you sure you want to delete this IKE Phase 1 Profile CONTINUE Key Management You specify your IKE key management on a per Connection Profile basis You can do this in one of three ways e You can create your IKE Phase 1 Profile first and then associate it with an existing Connection Profile e You can create a Connection Profile and then modify it to associate it with an existing IKE Phase 1 Profile e You can create a new Connection Profile and add a new IKE Phase 1 Profile as you go You can do this WAN Configuration menus Refer to Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 9 for instructions on creating a Connection Profile if you don t already know how to do that You can access the Key Managemen
145. e Connection Profile Name Easy Setup Profile Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered Local WAN IP Address 206 1 1 6 Local WAN IP Mask 255 255 255 248 PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Enter a subnet mask in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Enter basic information about your WAN connection with this screen Select NEXT SCREEN and press Return Your IP values are shown here IP Easy Setup Ethernet IP Address 192 168 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 Domain Name ISP net Primary Domain Name Server 173 166 Secondary Domain Name Server 173 166 Default IP Gateway 206 1 1 IP Address Serving On Number of Client IP Addresses 20 lst Client Address 192 168 PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Set up the basic IP amp IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen Then navigate to the Network Address Translation NAT screen Main gt System IP Network Address Menu Configuration Setup Translation NAT Multiple Network Address Translation 3 33 Select Show Change Public Range then Easy PAT Range and press Return Enter the value your ISP assigned for your public address 206 1 1 6 in this example Toggle Type to pat Your public address is then mapped to the remaining private IP addresses using PAT If you were not using the Easy PAT Range and Easy PAT List that are created by default by using Easy Setup you would have to define a public range an
146. e s connection to your ISP 4 The ISP s connection to the Internet If the connection from the computer to the gateway was not successful verify that the following conditions are in effect e The Router is turned on An Ethernet cable connects your PC s Ethernet card or built in Ethernet port to the Router e Telnet is available on your PC or Macintosh On a PC it must be specified in your system path You can usually find the application as c windows telnet exe Your PC or Macintosh is properly configured for TCP IP e Your PC or Macintosh has an IP address e Your PC or Macintosh has a subnet mask that matches or is compatible with the Router s subnet mask A 2 Firmware User Guide Note If you are attempting to modify the IP address or subnet mask from a previous successful configuration attempt you will need to clear the IP address or reset your Router to the factory default before reinitiating the configuration process For further information on resetting your Router to factory default see L How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults on page A 3 Network problems Problems communicating with remote IP hosts e Verify the accuracy of the default gateway s IP address entered in the IP Setup or Easy Setup screen e Use the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 s Ping utility in the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen and try to Ping local and remote hosts See Ping on page 10 2 for instructions
147. e 1 to many PAT you can connect more than five devices but use only one of your addresses Using multiNAT you can make full use of the address range The example assumes the following range of addresses offered by a typical ISP Local WAN IP address 206 1 1 6 Local WAN subnet mask 255 255 255 248 Remote IP address 206 1 1 254 Default gateway 206 1 1 254 Public IP addresses assigned by the ISP are 206 1 1 1 through 206 1 1 6 255 255 255 248 subnet mask Your internal devices have IP addresses of 192 168 1 1 through 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 subnet mask Netopia Router s address is 192 168 1 1 Web server s address is 192 168 1 253 Mail server s address is 192 168 1 254 FTP server s address is 192 168 1 253 In this example you will statically map the first five public IP addresses 206 1 1 1 206 1 1 5 to the first five corresponding private IP addresses 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 5 You will use these 1 to 1 mapped addresses to give your servers real addresses You will then map 206 1 1 6 to the remaining private IP addresses 192 168 1 6 192 168 1 254 using PAT The configuration process is as follows From the Main Menu go to the Easy Setup and then the Connection Profile screen Main Easy Connection Menu gt Setup gt Profile 3 32 Firmware User Guide Enter your ISP supplied values as shown below Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profil
148. e Member IP some_IP_address 127 0 0 2 Point 127 0 0 2 peer_tunnel_ Mask Gateway Static Route IP_address Remote Member some_IP_mask Destination Network Mask cannot be GRE 255 255 255 255 Static WAN IP Data Link Remote_Tunnel_End_Point Encapsulation 1483 1490 HDLC Destination Netmask PPP Remote_Tunnel_End_Point_ netmask Next Gateway local_WAN_IP IP 0 0 0 0 IP Default Gateway see above see above Mask 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 2 Dynamic WAN IP Gateway static route is recommended Remote IP see above see above see above some_IP_address Static PPPoE Remote Mask some_IP_mask Remote IP IP Default Gateway see above Remote Member IP 127 0 0 2 127 0 0 3 127 0 0 3 Auto PEFOE Remote Mask Remote Member 255 255 255 255 Mask cannot be 255 255 255 255 Note A GRE tunnel cannot transmit RIP routes over a force all tunnel or with a remote member IP with a host part of all zeros Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 15 About ATMP Tunnels To set up an ATMP tunnel you create a Connection Profile including the IP address and other relevant information for the remote ATMP partner ATMP uses the terminology of a foreign agent that initiates tunnels and a home agent that terminates them You use the same procedure to initiate or terminate an ATMP tunnel Used in this way the terms initiate and terminate mean the beginning and end of the tunnel they do not mean activate and deactivate ATMP is a tunneling protocol with
149. e data is destined for the Netopia s WAN interface IP address Otherwise the data is discarded Multiple Network Address Translation 3 5 Complex maps Map lists and server lists are completely independent of each other A Connection Profile can use one or the other or both MultiNAT allows complex mapping and requires more complex configuration than in earlier firmware versions Multiple mapped interior subnets are supported and the rules for mapping each of the subnets may be different The figure below illustrates a possible multiNAT configuration Public Addresses Private Addresses IP Host NAT Type 206 1 1 1 lt 7 192 168 1 253 Web FTP Server 1 1 Static 206 1 1 2 lt amp _ gt X 192 168 1 254 E mail Server 1 1 Static 206 1 1 3 lt a _ 206 1 1 4 lt a gt 1 192 168 1 1 252 LAN Users 1 1 Dynamic 206 1 1 5 a gt 9 2 206 1 1 6 lt _ 44 192 168 1 1 252 LAN Users 1 Many PAT 206 1 2 1 6 192 168 1 1 252 LAN Users 1 1 Dynamic possible later In order to support this type of mapping you define two address ranges First you define a public range which contains the first and last public address to be used and the way in which these addresses should be used PAT static or dynamic You then configure an address map which defines the private IP address or addresses to be used and which public range they should be mapped to You add the addre
150. e device you intend to use for the virtual private network connection This can be any device you have installed or connected to your PC Click the Next button A screen appears with fields for you to enter telephone numbers for the computer you want to connect to 3 Type the directory number or the Virtual Circuit Identifier number This number is provided by your ISP or corporate administrator Depending on the type of device you are using the number may or may not resemble an ordinary telephone directory number 4 Click the Next button The final window will give you a chance to accept or change the name you have entered for this profile If you are satisfied with it click the Finish button Your profile is complete Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 23 Configuring a Dial Up Networking profile Once you have created your Dial Up Networking profile you configure it for TCP IP networking to allow you to connect to the Internet through your Internet connection device Do the following 1 Double click the My Computer or whatever you have named it icon on your desktop Open the Dial Up Networking folder You will see the icon for the profile you created in the previous section Right click the icon and from the pop up menu select Properties In the Properties window click the Server Type button From the Type of Dial up Server pull down menu select the appropriate type of server for your system version Server Types 1 21 x Type
151. e gateway at the other end of your tunnel will use and whether or not you will be using VPN client software in a standalone remote connection Note You must choose which protocol you will be using since you cannot both export PPTP and use ATMP or vice versa at the same time Having both an ATMP tunnel and a PPTP export is not possible because functions require GRE and the Router s PPTP export server does not distinguish the GRE packets it forwards Since it processes all of them ATMP tunneling is impaired For example you cannot run an ATMP tunnel between two gateways and also have PPTP exported on one side Summary A Virtual Private Network VPN connects the components of one network over another network VPNs accomplish this by allowing you to tunnel through the Internet or another public network in a manner that provides the same security and features formerly available only in private networks VPNs allow networks to communicate across an IP network Your local networks connected to the Netopia Router can exchange data with remote networks that are also connected to a VPN capable gateway This feature provides individuals at home on the road or in branch offices with a cost effective and secure way to access resources on remote LANs connected to the Internet with Netopia Routers 4 4 Firmware User Guide About PPTP Tunnels To set up a PPTP tunnel you create a Connection Profile including the IP address and other relevant i
152. e router will consult the Clear Backup Call only if Idle timer to learn if the backup connection has been idle for the specified seconds If the connection has been idle for the specified seconds then the teardown process of the backup connection will begin Requires idle time of seconds specifies how long the device should wait before permitting the call to be torn down after a period of inactivity Data Link Encapsulation is set to Async PPP This field is not editable When you are finished press Escape 7 12 Firmware User Guide Using Scheduled Connections with Backup The backup link is a PPP dial up connection and only connects to the Internet service provider when traffic is initiated from the LAN If you want to use the backup link to provide redundancy for services such as a Web service that you provide to the outside world you must force the connection to stay up You do this by creating a scheduled connection entry that will be a permanent forced up connection for the backup modem The backup modem will be activated upon primary WAN link failure and remain active until primary WAN link recovery To configure a Scheduled Connection from the Main Menu select WAN Configuration and then Scheduled Connections Main WAN Advanced Connection Scheduled Menu Configuration Options Connections The Scheduled Connections screen appears Scheduled Connections Display Change Scheduled Connect
153. ed access to the desired services ports on the Web and Mail servers To make these changes first limit the range of remapped addresses on the Static Map and then edit the default server list called Easy Servers Multiple Network Address Translation 3 35 e First navigate to the Show Change Map List screen select Easy PAT List and then Show Change Maps Choose the Static Map you created and change the First Private Address from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 4 Now the Router Web and Mail servers IP addresses are no longer included in the range of static mappings and are therefore no longer accessible to the outside world Users on the Internet will not be able to Telnet Web SNMP or ping to them It is best also to navigate to the public range screen and change the Static Range to go from 206 1 1 5 e Next navigate to Show Change Server List and select Easy Servers and then Add Server You should export both the Web www http and Mail smtp ports to one of the now free public addresses Select Service and from the resulting pop up menu select www http In the resulting screen enter your Web server s address 192 168 1 2 and the public address for example 206 1 1 2 and then select ADD NAT SERVER Now return to Add Server choose the smtp port and enter 192 168 1 3 your Mail server s IP address for the Server Private IP Address You can decide if you want to present both your Web and Mail services as being on the same public address 206
154. ed service Multiple Network Address Translation 3 17 Other Exported Port First Port Number 1 65535 31337 Last Port Number 1 65535 31337 e Enter the First and Last Port Number between ports 1 and 65535 Select OK and press Return You will be returned to the Add NAT Server screen e Enter the Server Private IP Address of the server whose service you are exporting Since MultiNAT permits the mapping of multiple private IP addresses to multiple public IP addresses your ISP or corporate site s Router must be configured such that it knows that your multiple public addresses are accessible via your Router If you want to use static mappings to map internal servers to public addresses your ISP or corporate site s Router must also be configured for static routes to these public addresses on the Netopia Router Enter the Public IP Address to which you are exporting the service Note For PAT map lists and server lists if you use the Public Address 0 0 0 0 the list will acquire its public IP address from the WAN IP address specified by your WAN IP configuration in the Connection Profile If that is a static IP address then the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address If it is a negotiated IP address such as may be assigned via DHCP or PPP the PAT map list and server lists will acquire that address each time it is negotiated e Select ADD NAT SERVER and press Return The server will be added to your server l
155. ed with the wired LAN You must reboot the unit for this setting to take effect SSID Wireless ID The SSID is preset to a number that is unique to your unit You can either leave it as is or change it by entering a freeform name of up to 32 characters for example Ed s Wireless LAN On client PCs software this might also be called the Network Name The SSID is used to identify this particular wireless LAN Depending on their operating system or client wireless card users must either e select from a list of available wireless LANs that appear in a scanned list on their client e or if you are in Closed System Mode see Closed System on page 2 31 enter this name on their cli ents in order to join this wireless LAN You can then configure Channel 1 through 11 on which the network will broadcast This is a frequency range within the 2 4Ghz band Channel selection depends on government regulated radio frequencies that vary from region to WAN and System Configuration 2 31 region The widest range available is from 1 to 14 However in North America only 1 to 11 may be selected Europe France Spain and Japan will differ Channel selection can have a significant impact on performance depending on other wireless activity close to this Gateway Channel selection is not necessary at the client computers the clients will scan the available channels seeking access points using the same ESSID as the client e Closed Sys
156. efault Profile ATMP PPTP Default Profile IKE Phase 1 Configuration Advanced Connection Options Return Enter to create a new Connection Profile From here you will configure yours and the remote sites WAN information The Choose Interface to Configure screen appears These settings govern the general modem behavior Choose Interface to Configure ADSL Setup MODEM Wan Module 2 Setup Line Backup 7 9 Choose the interface to configure for backup MODEM Wan Module 2 Setup The Internal Modem Setup screen appears Internal Modem Setup Modem Dialing Prefix ATDT PBX Dialing Prefix Line Directory Number Speaker On Until Carrier Speaker Volume 2 Medium Answer Incoming calls Always Country United States Enter the dialing prefix to be sent to all modems Modem Dialing Prefix ATDT is the standard Hayes compatible code for alerting the modem itself You probably don t need to change this unless you have a good reason and are familiar with the Hayes modem command set PBX Dialing Prefix If you are connected to a Centrex or PBX phone system that requires you to dial a prefix number Such as 9 for an outside line enter it here Line Directory Number Enter the telephone number for the line you are connected to Speaker On You can set how you want to hear dialing and connection tones generated by the modem or you can turn them off from the pull down menu Options are Neve
157. efaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as your default gateway it is shown here CPU Load Percentage of the system s resources being used by all current transmissions Unused Memory The total remaining system memory available for use Primary DNS Server If you are using the gateway s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as your primary default gateway it is shown here Secondary DNS Server If you are using the gateway s defaults DHCP and NAT this value will be 0 0 0 0 If you have assigned an IP address as a secondary gateway it is shown here Domain Name The domain name you have assigned typically the name of your ISP MAC Address The Router s hardware address for those interfaces that support DHCP IP Address The Router s IP address entered in the IP Setup screen Monitoring Tools 8 3 Current status The current status section is a table showing the current status of the DSL connection For example Current WAN Connection Status Profile Name Rate Use Remote Address ISP 1536 10 IP 92 163 4 1 Lel NAT 192 163 100 6 Profile Name Lists the name of the connection profile being used if any Rate Shows the line rate for this connection Use Indicates the average percent utilization of the maximum capacity of the channels in use for the connection Remote Address Shows the IP address of the connected remote
158. em by selecting the Restart System item in the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen You must restart the system whenever you reconfigure the Router and want the new parameter values to take effect Under certain circumstances restarting the system may also clear up system or network malfunctions Some configuration processes automatically restart the system to apply the changes you have made Troubleshooting A 1 Appendix A Troubleshooting This appendix is intended to help you troubleshoot problems you may encounter while setting up and using Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 It also includes information on how to contact Netopia Technical Support Important information on these problems can be found in the event histories kept by the Router These event histories can be accessed in the Statistics amp Logs screen This section covers the following topics i Configuration Problems on page A 1 ti How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults on page A 3 Power Outages on page A 3 i Technical Support on page A 3 Configuration Problems If you encounter problems during your initial configuration process review the following suggestions before calling for technical support There are four zones to consider when troubleshooting initial configuration 1 The computer s connection to the gateway 2 The gateway s connection to the telecommunication line s 3 The telecommunication lin
159. ement IP Setup Filter Sets Date and Time SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Upgrade Feature Set Change Device to a Router A Logging Use this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Select Change Device to a Router Press Return confirm your choice and the device will restart in router mode Logging You can configure a UNIX compatible syslog client to report a number of subsets of the events entered in the Router s WAN Event History See WAN Event History on page 8 5 The Syslog client for the PC only is available on the Netopia CD Select Logging from the System Configuration menu WAN and System Configuration 2 39 The Logging Configuration screen appears Logging Configuration WAN Event Log Options Log Boot and Errors Log Line Specific Log Connections Log PPP DHCP CNA Log IP Syslog Parameters Syslog Enabled No Hostname or IP Address Facility Local 0 By default all events are logged in the event history By toggling each event descriptor to either Yes or No you can determine which ones are logged and which are ignored You can enable or disable the syslog client dynamically When enabled it will report any appropriate and previously unreported events You can specify the syslog server s address either in dotted decimal format or as a DNS name up to 63 characters You can specify the UNIX syslog Facility to use by selec
160. emove a component click the check box A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components S85 HyperTerminal M Phone Dialer 0 2 MB f Space required 1 3 MB Space available on disk 508 8 MB Description Enables you to connect to other computers by using a modem Desie Cancel 5 In the Communications window select Dial Up Networking and click the OK button This returns you to the Windows Setup screen Click the OK button Respond to the prompts to install Dial Up Networking from the system disks or CDROM When prompted reboot your PC Creating a new Dial Up Networking profile A Dial Up Networking profile is like an address book entry that contains the information and parameters you need for a secure private connection You can create this profile by using either the Internet Connection Wizard or the Make New Connection feature of Dial Up Networking The following instructions tell you how to create the profile with the Make New Connection feature Do the following 1 Double click the My Computer or whatever you have named it icon on your desktop Open the Dial Up Networking folder and then double click Make New Connection The Make New Connection wizard window appears 2 Type a name for this connection such as the name of your company or the computer you are dialing into From the pull down menu select th
161. end Password KRKKKE KKK KKKKEEKRKEKKKEKE PREVIOUS SCREEN NEXT SCREEN Return Enter brings you to next screen The Local WAN IP Address is used to configure a NAT public address range consisting of the Local WAN IP Address and all its ports The public address map list is named Easy PAT List and the port map list is named Easy Servers Multiple Network Address Translation 3 7 The two map lists Easy PAT List and Easy Servers are created by default and NAT configuration becomes effective This will map all your private addresses 0 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 255 to your public address These map lists are bound to the Easy Setup Profile See Binding Map Lists and Server Lists on page 3 21 This is all you need to do if you want to continue to use a single PAT or 1 to many NAT configuration Server Lists and Dynamic NAT configuration You use the advanced NAT feature sets by first defining a series of mapping rules and then grouping them into a list There are two kinds of lists map lists made up of dynamic PAT and static mapping rules and server lists a list of internal services to be presented to the external world Creating these lists is a four step process 1 Define the public range of addresses that external computers should use to get to the NAT internal machines These are the addresses that someone on the Internet would see Create a List name that will act as a rule or server holder Create a map or rule that specifies
162. er that forwards the traffic Toggle Forward to Yes This will display the Force Routing options e Toggle Force Routing to Yes e Enter the Gateway IP Address in standard dotted quad notation to which the traffic should be forwarded You can enter Source and Destination IP Address es and Mask s Protocol Type and Source and Destination Port ID s for the filter if desired TOS field matching Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 adds two additional new parameters to an IP filter TOS and TOS Mask Both fields accept values in the range O 255 Certain types of IP packets such as voice or multimedia packets are sensitive to latency introduced by the network A delay sensitive packet is one that has the low latency bit set in the TOS field of the IP header This means that if such packets are not received rapidly the quality of service degrades If you expect to route significant amounts of such traffic you can configure your router to route this type of traffic to a gateway other than your normal gateway using this feature The TOS field matching check is consistent with source and destination address matching Example You want packets with the TOS low latency bit to go through VC 2 via gateway 127 0 0 3 instead of your normal gateway You would set up the filter as follows 9 34 Firmware User Guide Add Input Filter Enabled Yes Forward Yes Call Placement Idle Reset No Change Force Routing Yes Gateway IP Address 127 So
163. ering any address that is part of the subnet DHCP BootP and dynamic WAN clients may receive an address from any one of the address serving pools configured on this screen IP Setup 6 21 Numerous factors influence the choice of served address It is difficult to specify the address that will be served to a particular client in all circumstances However when the address server has been configured and the clients involved have no prior address serving interactions the Router will generally serve the first unused address from the first address pool with an available address The Router starts from the pool on the first row and continues to the pool on the last row of this screen Once the address server and or the clients have participated in address serving transactions different rules apply When requesting an address a client will often suggest an address to be assigned such as the one it was last served The Router will attempt to honor this request if the address is available The client stores this address in non volatile storage for example on disk and the specific storage method location differs depending on the client operating system e When requesting an address a client may provide a client identifier or if it does not the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 may construct a pseudo client identifier for the client When the client subsequently requests an address the Router will attempt to serve the address previously associate
164. es csscssesscsecsscoseeeeeeeees 9 9 Telnet ACCOSS urarena ai ai AE 9 16 About Filters and Filter Sets ciescicaaciiccescessacenecesacusdeeweans 9 17 What s a filter and what s a filter set 0065 9 17 HOW filter Sets WOrK wissedsdssisestenenenedadensanesncaeereost 9 17 How individual filters work ccesceeeeeeneeeeenereees 9 18 Design guideline S rinrin rannan 9 23 Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets cccsecseeneeeees 9 24 Adding a fiter Setinin 9 25 Deleting a MENSE ssec aiao 9 29 A sample filter SOlsiscvaceesencsetvacaveetatenssettatacataitenss 9 29 Policy based Routing using Filtersets cece 9 32 TOS Teld MANINE sorpresaren en 9 33 Fite welll MUVOMGl soiien ae i S 9 35 General firewall terMS ccscsesssessesseceseneseeees 9 35 Basic IP packet COMPONENTS scesessceseeeeeees 9 35 Basie Protocol YW NSSiiscinisasssscnectveenasoasnesiessstaesancnss 9 35 Firewall G Sigii UGS sacisscie ced iscavaceeddtadsasadacseentoses 9 36 RASE EE A A A AT 9 38 Example fMtErS ioina anaa tanni 9 39 Configuration MANASEMEMNM wae sence cecssesssesseecteceeeeceereencees 9 42 viii Firmware User Guide a r E A E E ST 9 44 Chapter 10 Utilities and Diagnostics cccccceseeeeeeeeneeeees 10 1 PUNE sca E EA pecs a E E 10 2 Mace ROUUC rianan 10 4 TENETE anadai 10 5 Factory Defaults cecsiecsnasscontacssedearecaneradersasnexesnerrscvennnsns 10 6 Transferring Conf
165. es further in order to limit access to only certain portions of those interfaces configuration by selecting Custom If you select Custom the Access Privileges Custom screen appears Security Access Privileges Custom WAN Data Configuration Yes Connection Profile Configuration Yes Circuit PVC DLCI Configuration Yes LAN Data Configuration Yes LAN Subnet Configuration Yes NAT Filters Configuration Yes Preferences Global Configuration Yes OK CANCEL Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Since authentication via RADIUS server is by definition authentication of remote users the WAN related defaults are preset to Yes Toggle any that should be changed 9 7 9 8 Firmware User Guide TACACS server authentication Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports TACACS server authentication Its application to a Netopia Router is to control access to the Router s management interface and to audit commands submitted by a user TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System protocol provides access control for Netopia Routers via a centralized server TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services TACACS allows a client to accept a username and password and query a TACACS authentication server Remote Authentication Security Databases Remote Server Addr Name Remote Server Secret Alt Remote Server Addr Name Alt Remote Server Secret TACACS Accounti
166. esses being distributed by DHCP or MaclP A single IP address range is used by all the address served clients These include DHCP BootP MaclIP and WAN clients even though BootP and static MacIP clients might not be considered served The address range specified for address served clients cannot wrap around from the end of the total available range back to the beginning See below for a further explanation and an example The network address issued by an ISP cannot be used as a host address A DHCP example Suppose for example that your ISP gave your network the IP address 199 1 1 32 and a 4 bit subnet mask Address 199 1 1 32 is reserved as the network address Address 199 1 1 47 is reserved as the broadcast address This leaves 14 addresses to allocate from 199 1 1 33 through 199 1 1 46 If you want to allocate a sub block of 10 addresses using DHCP enter 10 in the DHCP Setup screen s Number of Addresses to Allocate item Then in the same screen s First Address item enter the first address in the sub block to allocate so that all 10 addresses are within your original block You could enter 199 1 1 33 or 199 1 1 37 or any address between them Note that if you entered 199 1 1 42 as the first address network routing errors would probably result because you would be using a range with addresses that do not belong to your network 199 1 1 49 199 1 1 50 and 199 1 1 51 The DHCP server would not initialize if set incorrectly
167. esssenesenenesenenesanes 7 14 Backup Configuration screen cscceeeeeeeeneenees 7 14 IP Setup SONG Cliliganstccvecsaecedcrcnecadecsereeutuasesesedcreg 7 16 Backup Management StattiStiCs cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 QUICK VIEW scsssactonenaressduesaceammpacuseeciaaerss o AEE 7 18 Chapter 8 Monitoring Tools ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 Quick View Status OVErVvieW ccccsccececceceeeeceseeceseeeeees 8 1 General Stason a 8 2 CUNEN StA inisee r E 8 3 taruSoN Sae O aa 8 3 Statistiese LOSS nsan ern i ar 8 4 Event HI StONG neins e e aea 8 4 IPSROUUINS TABI scesccceicienspesnetieatonguiad a ssdeaunesewenadasaeans 8 7 General Statistics cccccseceseseseeeneceneneseeeneseneneseeenesas 8 7 Systemi MIONN at Oasa aan EEI 8 9 Contents vii Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 55 8 10 The SNMP Setup SCIreen ccscceceececeeeeeeeeees 8 11 SNMP tra DS aisiescveaxotsesdtedeceddagnctitdexadaswasoantisddednans 8 12 Chapter 9 Security 2 c cccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 Suggested Security Meds Uf ESen iaa 9 1 Telnet Tiered Access Two Password Levels s0s0ee0e 9 2 WPAP SUP POM ceesre e AREA 9 2 Superuser CONMBUNATION semseiana 9 3 Limited user CONTBUPAT ON ssisisrsiiiinn tiai 9 4 Advanced Security OptiOnS sraninannsismninseseien 9 6 USEF ACCESS PASSWONG sissicsncadeeccsnemcestiiinencrwewennnews 9 8 User Menu ifferenc
168. ey EMY insiden arnai 5 19 MPN OUICKRVI GW asion na aane 5 20 WAN Event History Error Reporting 0cceeeeees 5 21 Chapter 6 IP Se tu pisces Sc cce s esi cesis ctu sesvews te ccls Ss scive vet eesvistuesetee 6 1 IP SetU Peereerer eee eeeet cere O 6 2 IP SUDANE Sienen cnecaeteitncenecins 6 4 Slate TOUTES gios anaie e ai 6 6 RIP 2 MDS Authentication iaa 6 10 OVEerV EW oo ccecececececeueueueuseseeeseeeeeeeeeeguauaueuevaveuens 6 10 vi Firmware User Guide Authentication CONMZUAUON cecscsadssccisiesastsmecsancnas 6 10 Connection Profiles and Default Profile 6 15 IP Address Serving sctadtaceindvarsctecticceanacaebnadesacsideacaartade 6 17 IP Address POOIS irronneen 6 20 DHCP NetBIOS Option sscsscccsteteiedcosateccatteedaseotans 6 21 More Address Serving OptionS ccsccsscsecetesecetenesaees 6 23 Configuring the IP Address Server options 6 24 DHCP Relay AGU irie A 6 28 CONMECTION PrOtleS iruren 6 30 Multicast FOrWalGING irsin E 6 33 Chapter 7 Line Backup 2 ccescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 Configuring BACKUP usiessa aaia 7 1 Connection Profile S siraririirsisiniiei diniinan 7 2 IP Setup rreren a S 7 7 WAN COMPS UratiO ml sivccsecciescsiicondcaseds sundatedicaisuesiastotiaasedeced 7 8 Backup Configuration SCr e n icsccsccccccesecceeavecevere 7 10 Using Scheduled Connections with Backup 0 c0e00 7 12 Backup Default Gatewa ccccsccsecsses
169. f the network and the identity of the individual host on the network The number of bits used for the network number and the number of bits used for the host number can vary as long as certain rules are followed The local network manager assigns IP host numbers to individual machines B 2 Firmware User Guide IP addresses are maintained and assigned by the InterNIC a quasi governmental organization now increasingly under the auspices of private industry Note It s very common for an organization to obtain an IP address from a third party usually an Internet service provider ISP ISPs usually issue an IP address when they are contracted to provide Internet access services The InterNIC the NIC stands for Network Information Center divides IP addresses into several classes Classes A B and C are assigned to organizations that request addresses In Class A networks the first byte of an IP address is reserved for the network portion of the address Class B networks reserve the first two bytes of an IP address for the network address Class C networks reserve the first three bytes of an IP address for the network address In all cases a network manager can decide to use subnetting to assign even more bits to the network portion of the IP address but never less than the class requires The following section gives more information on subnetting Class A networks have a small number of possible network numbers but a large number of possible h
170. ferent one you can reboot the gateway with your selected configuration 9 44 Firmware User Guide Configuration Management Save Current Configuration as Configuration Name Type Replace Existing Configuration Boot from a Configuration Backup Config Binary Delete a Configuration HappyInternet A warning screen will ask you to confirm your choice TFTP You can also send or receive your stored configuration files via TFTP You select the stored configuration files from pull down menus in the TFTP File Transfer screen in the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu as shown Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP TFTP Server Name Firmware File Name GET ROUTER FIRMWARE FROM SERVER Config File Name Get Configuration Destination Current Configuration GET CONFIG FROM SERVER Backup Config HappyInternet Send Configuration lt Empty gt Type Name SEND CONFIG TO SERVER TFTP Transfer State Idle TFTP Current Transfer Bytes 0 Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Utilities and Diagnostics 10 1 Chapter 10 Utilities and Diagnostics A number of utilities and tests are available for system diagnostic and control purposes This section covers the following topics Ping on page 10 2 Trace Route on page 10 4 Telnet Client on page 10 5 Factory Defaults on page 10 6 Transferring Configurat
171. ffic Five minutes after all traffic ceases no pings all TCP connections closed no DNS requests etc the address is put at the head of an available list If an interior host needs an exterior address an hour later and the previously used address is still available it will acquire the same address If an interior host that has not previously been allocated an exterior address needs one it will be allocated the last hence the oldest exterior address on the available list All NAT configurations are rule based This means that traffic passed through NAT from either the public or the private network is compared to the rules and mappings configured in the Netopia Router in a particular order The first rule that applies to the traffic being initiated is used For example if a connection is initiated from the public network and is destined for a public IP address configured on the Netopia Router the following comparisons are made in this order 1 The Netopia Router first checks its internal NAT cache to see if the data is part of a previously initiated connection if not 2 The Netopia Router checks the configured server lists to see if this traffic is intended to be forwarded to an internal host based on the type of service 3 The Netopia Router then checks to see if there is a static dynamic or PAT mapping for the public IP address that the connection is being initiated to 4 The Netopia Router answers the request itself if th
172. file in the previous section If you contact us by telephone please be ready to supply Netopia Technical Support with the information you used to configure the Router Also please be at the site of the problem and prepared to reproduce it and to try some troubleshooting steps When you are prepared contact Netopia Technical Support by e mail telephone fax or post Internet ask_netopia netopia com for technical support info netopia com for general information Phone 1 510 597 5400 Fax 1 510 420 7601 Netopia Inc Customer Services 6001 Shellmound Street Emeryville California 94608 USA Online product information Product information can be found in the following Netopia World Wide Web server via http www netopia com Internet via anonymous FTP to ftp netopia com pub Understanding IP Addressing B 1 Appendix B Understanding IP Addressing This appendix is a brief general introduction to IP addressing A basic understanding of IP will help you in configuring the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 and using some of its powerful features such as static routes and packet filtering This section covers the following topics e What is IP on page B 1 e About IP Addressing on page B 1 Distributing IP Addresses on page B 5 e Nested IP Subnets on page B 11 e Broadcasts on page B 14 What is IP All networks use protocols to establish common standards for communication One widely used
173. for forwarding multicasting This protocol is Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Two versions of IGMP are available V1 and V2 Netopia gateways can use either one however Multicast Forwarding will only work if your service provider supports it Check with your service provider You configure Multicast Forwarding in two Telnet menu screens e First you enable Multicast Forwarding in the IP Setup screen in the System Configuration menu e Then you associate it with a Connection Profile in the IP Profile Parameters screen in the Add Display Change Connection Profile menus Navigate to the IP Setup screen ie m System Configuration eae By default Multicast Forwarding is tuned off None You enable the gateway to transmit multicast data by selecting Tx from the pulldown menu IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway Backup IP Gateway Primary Domain Name Server Secondary Domain Name Server Domain Name Receive RIP Transmit RIP Multicast Forwarding IGMP Version Static Routes IP Address Serving If you enable Multicast Forwarding you will see a new option IGMP Version This lets you choose V1 or V2 If you know you will be communicating with other hosts that are limited to V1 select V1 otherwise allow the default V2 Navigate to the IP Profile Parameters screen 6 34 Firmware User Guide
174. ful Inspection Enabled No Filter Set Remove Filter Set Enable PPP over Ethernet off WAN Ethernet Speed Setting Auto Negotiation Wan Ethernet MAC Address 00 fc de fa dd 02 DHCP Client Mode Standards Based RIP Options Set up the basic IP attributes of your Ethernet Module in this screen 3 28 Firmware User Guide The IP Profile Parameters screen found under the WAN Configuration menu Add Change Connection Profile screen appears as shown IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers p ar Options Stateful Inspection Enabled No Local WAN IP Address 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 Filter Set Remove Filter Set RIP Profile Options Toggle to Yes if this is a single IP address ISP account Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here If you select NAT Options in either case the NAT Options screen appears NAT Options IP Passthrough Enabled Toggle ON to allow local WAN IP address to be used on LAN in addition to NAT If you toggle IP Passthrough Enabled to Yes additional field s appear Multiple Network Address Translation 3 29 NAT Options IP Passthrough Enabled Yes IP Passthrough DHCP Enabled Yes IP Passthrough DHCP MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Enter MAC addr of IP passthrough host or zeroes for first come first serve Toggli
175. gateway Est Indicates whether the connection was locally Lel or remotely Rmt established More Info Indicates the NAT address in use for this connection Status lights This section shows the current real time status of the Router s status lights LEDs It is useful for remotely monitoring the gateway s status The Quick View screen s arrangement of LEDs corresponds to the physical arrangement of LEDs on the gateway These LEDs and the corresponding display in the Telnet menu screen will vary by model LED Status G G Each LED representation can report one of four states The LED is off R The LED is red G The LED is green Y The LED is yellow 8 4 Firmware User Guide Statistics amp Logs Main Menu I Statistics amp Logs When you are troubleshooting your Router the Statistics amp Logs screens provide insight into the recent event activities of the gateway From the Main Menu go to Statistics amp Logs and select one of the options described in the sections below Event Histories Main Menu e WAN Event History Statistics amp Logs e Device Event History The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 records certain relevant occurrences in event histories Event histories are useful for diagnosing problems because they list what happened before during and after a problem occurs You can view two different event histories one for t
176. gateway or workstation s default gateway or where they will send their packets if the appropriate route is not known The Static Route field which is only shown on Router B tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Router B Finally the Usable IP Address field shows the range of IP addresses available to the hosts of that network Note that the IP addresses given in this section are for example purposes only Do not use these addresses when configuring your network With this configuration both Customer Site A and B can gain Internet access through Routers A and B with no reconfiguration of the ISP s equipment The most important item in this configuration is the static route defined on Router B This tells Router B what path to take to get to the network defined by Router B Without this information Customer Site B will be able to access Customer Site A but not the Internet If it is not possible to define a static route on Router B RIP could be enabled to serve the same purpose To use RIP instead of a static route enable Transmit RIP on Router A and Transmit and Receive RIP on Router B This will allow the route from Customer Site B to propagate on Router B and Customer Site A Example Working with a Class C subnet Suppose that your organization has a site with only 10 hosts and no plans to add any new hosts You don t need a full Class C address for this site Many ISPs offer Internet access with only a portion
177. gle or a few IP address es instead of a routed account with separate IP addresses for each computer on the network Network Address Translation also provides increased security by hiding the local IP addresses of the LAN connected to the Netopia gateways from the outside world The setup is simpler so ISPs typically offer Internet accounts supporting Network Address Translation at a significant cost savings For a detailed discussion of Network Address Translation see Chapter 3 Multiple Network Address Translation 6 2 Firmware User Guide IP Setup Main System Menu Configuration pm IP Setup The IP Setup options screen is where you configure the Ethernet side of the Router The information you enter here controls how the gateway routes IP traffic Consult your network administrator or ISP to obtain the IP setup information Such as the Ethernet IP address Ethernet subnet mask default IP gateway and Primary Domain Name Server IP address you will need before changing any of the settings in this screen Changes to these settings that you make in this screen will take effect only after the Netopia device is reset To go to the IP Setup options screen from the Main Menu select System Configuration then IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 128 117 162 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway 128 117 163 Backup
178. he WAN setup datalink encapsulation Connection Profiles or Default Gateway will take effect until after the Netopia Router is restarted Until the Netopia Router is restarted the WAN link and the routing table remain unaffected A single setting in the Advanced Connection Options screen controls this feature as shown below Advanced Connection Options EH Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection Scheduled Connections Backup Configuration Prioritize Delay Sensitive Data No Return Enter to configure SA Backup Parameters WAN and System Configuration 2 15 When you toggle Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection either to Yes or No using the Tab key and press Return a pop up window asks you to confirm your choice Advanced Connection Options The Router will now be restarted to allow this feature to function properly Are you sure you want to do this CONTINUE Toggling from Yes to No makes the router ready to be configured If you toggle from No to Yes after any configuration changes have been entered and confirm the reboot your changes are committed and the router comes up using the newly created configuration Scheduled Connections Scheduled connections are useful for PPPoE PPTP and ATMP connection profiles To go to the Scheduled Connections screen from the WAN Configuration screen select Advanced Connection Options and then select Scheduled Connections Main WAN Advanced Scheduled Menu
179. he gateway s system and one for the WAN The gateway s event histories are structured to display the most recent events first and to make it easy to distinguish error messages from informational messages Error messages are prefixed with an asterisk Both the WAN Event History and Device Event History retain records of the 128 most recent events In the Statistics amp Logs screen select WAN Event History or Device Event History Monitoring Tools 8 5 WAN Event History The WAN Event History screen lists a total of 128 events on the WAN The most recent events appear at the top WAN Event History Current Date 10 11 2003 03 02 23 PM 07 03 03 IP up channel 1 gateway 173 166 107 1 07 03 03 Channel 1 up 07 03 03 data link activated at 1040 Kbps 07 03 03 Device restarted 07 03 03 Device restarted 07 03 03 Device restarted 07 02 03 DSL IP up channel 1 gateway 173 166 107 1 07 02 03 DSL Channel 1 up 07 02 03 10 gt gt WAN data link activated at 1040 Kbps 07 02 03 DSL IP down channel 1 07 02 03 Link 1 down No Synch 07 02 03 05 gt gt WAN data link deactivated 07 02 03 DSL IP up channel 1 gateway 173 166 107 1 07 02 03 Channel 1 up Clear History Return Enter on event item for details or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling Each entry in the list contains the following information Date Date of the event Time Time of the event Event A brief description of the
180. he list of served IP addresses Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 192 168 Details 192 168 Exclude 192 168 Release 192 168 Reserve 192 168 192 168 Lease Management Once you select an entry pressing Return displays an action pop up menu that lists operations that can be performed on that entry Possible operations are Details Exclude Include Release and Reserve The action popup is context sensitive and lists only those operations that apply to the selected IP address in its current lease state e Details is displayed if the entry is associated with both a host name and a client identifier 6 26 Firmware User Guide Selecting Details displays a pop up menu that provides additional information associated with the IP address The pop up menu includes the IP address as well as the host name and client identifier supplied by the client to which the address is leased Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 101 IP Address is 192 168 1 108 Host Name is Barr s XPi 120 Client ID is EN 00 00 c5 45 89 ef 192 168 1 111 192 168 1 112 192 168 1 113 Lease Management Exclude is displayed if the entry is not already excluded Selecting Exclude excludes the IP address from the address serving pool so the address will not
181. he map list you selected will now be bound to this Connection Profile Select NAT Server List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined server lists Address Trans IP Addressing NAT Map List NAT Server Li Local WAN IP Local WAN IP Remote IP Add Remote IP Mas Filter Set Remove Filter Receive RIP IP Profile Parameters NAT Server List Name Easy Servers my servers lt lt None gt gt 8 mbered 0 0 2 5 255 255 255 tBIOS Filter th Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Select the server list you want to bind to this Connection Profile and press Return The server list you selected will now be bound to this Connection Profile Note There is no interdependency between NAT and IP Addressing Also the Local WAN IP Address and Mask fields visibility are dependent only on the IP Addressing type Multiple Network Address Translation 3 23 IP Parameters WAN Default Profile The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 using RFC 1483 supports a WAN default profile that permits several parameters to be configured without an explicitly configured Connection Profile The procedure is similar to the procedure to bind map lists and server lists to a Connection Profile From the Main Menu go to the WAN Configuration screen then the Default Profile screen Select IP Parameters and press Return Main Menu WAN WAN Default IP Parame
182. heduled connection Select CANCEL to exit the Add Scheduled Connection screen without saving the new scheduled connection Modifying a scheduled connection To modify a scheduled connection select Display Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of scheduled connections Select a scheduled connection from the table and press Return The Change Scheduled Connection screen appears The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Scheduled Connection screen except that ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION and CANCEL do not appear To find out how to set them see Adding a scheduled connection on page 2 17 Deleting a scheduled connection To delete a scheduled connection select Delete Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of scheduled connections Select a scheduled connection from the table and press the Return key to delete it To exit the table without deleting the selected scheduled connection press the Escape key Backup Configuration See Line Backup on page 7 1 Priority Queuing TOS bit Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers the ability to prioritize delay sensitive data over the WAN link Certain types of IP packets such as voice or multimedia packets are sensitive to latency introduced by the network This means that if such packets are not received rapidly the quality of service degrades If you expect to route significant amounts
183. ht must go into designing a new filter set You should consider the following guidelines e Be sure the filter set s overall purpose is clear from the beginning A vague purpose can lead to a faulty set and that can actually make your network ess secure e Be sure each individual filter s purpose is clear e Determine how filter priority will affect the set s actions Test the set on paper by determining how the filters would respond to a number of different hypothetical packets e Consider the combined effect of the filters If every filter in a set fails to match on a particular packet the packet is e Forwarded if all the filters are configured to discard not forward e Discarded if all the filters are configured to forward Discarded if the set contains a combination of forward and discard filters Disadvantages of filters Although using filter sets can greatly enhance network security there are disadvantages e Filters are complex Combining them in filter sets introduces subtle interactions increasing the likelihood of implementation errors e Enabling a large number of filters can have a negative impact on performance Processing of packets will take longer if they have to go through many checkpoints Too much reliance on packet filters can cause too little reliance on other security methods Filter sets are not a substitute for password protection effective safeguarding of passwords caller ID the must ma
184. ide Support for Yahoo Messenger Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 provides Application Level Gateway ALG support for Yahoo Messenger This allows Yahoo Messenger users to exchange files even when both users are behind NAT Previously the file transfer function would work only if one or neither of the two users were behind NAT Currently there is a restriction that the remote user must be routed to via the WAN interface otherwise the connections will fail There is no restriction as to the number of connections There is no user configuration required for this feature MultiNAT Configuration You configure the MultiNAT features through the Telnet menu e For a simple 1 to many NAT configuration classic NAT or PAT use the Easy Setup Profile configuration described below e For the more advanced features such as server lists and dynamic NAT follow the instructions in IP setup described on page 3 7 IP profile parameters described on page 3 21 Easy Setup Profile configuration The screen below is an example Depending on the type of Router you are using fields displayed in this screen may vary Connection Profile 1 Easy Setup Profile Connection Profile Name Easy Setup Profile Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered Local WAN IP Address 0 0 0 Local WAN IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Remote IP Address 127 0 0 2 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 255 PPP Authentication PAP Send User Name tonyf S
185. ients once or twice a day NetMeeting will not work unless a static one to one mapping exists for the machine running NetMeeting to use for communication The customer does not have enough IP addresses to create a one to one mapping for each of the seven users This is where dynamic NAT applies The customer can configure four of these addresses to be used for Dynamic NAT The fifth address is then used for the eight other machines that do not need one to one mappings As each machine configured to use addresses from the dynamic pool tries to connect to the Internet it is allocated a public IP address to use temporarily Once the communication has been terminated that IP address is freed for one of the other six hosts to use 3 4 Firmware User Guide Available for Dynamic NAT Used for Normal NAT 3 2 Boi lod RI N N N RI N N N N N a a a D D gt gt D a a a N N N N N a WAN Network ite pd e ele el elele eleke elel eleele LAN Network 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 a dd ss as ss ee ed ee 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 pede id i as ad is ls al ld fpi id Bonia Baia Pais Exterior addresses are allocated to internal hosts on a demand or as needed basis and then made available when traffic from that host ceases Once an internal host has been allocated an address it will use that address for all tra
186. iguration and Firmware Files with TFTP 10 6 Updating MMMWA S osaisin 10 7 Downloading configuration files cscceeeneeeees 10 7 Uploading configuration files cccceeeseeneeeeenees 10 8 Restarting the Systemi wiscssssiccsdsedeecsasdid tiscssieeincasetendcende 10 8 Appendix A TroubleShooting c ccscccseeeeeseeeeeseneeeeeneeeeeneneees A 1 Configuration PFODIEMS sree seriden ianea A 1 Network problem Sisri aaas A 2 How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults c 006 A 3 POW QUUAS ES idesncsiasicwacetateenand E EA REENA A 3 Technical SUPPOIE scrire ia anaa aS A 3 HOW to reach US eiis A 4 Appendix B Understanding IP Addressing sssssssssseeseees B 1 WhatisdpPa oseaan B 1 About IP AG GKESSING aseiniad agan n a B 1 Subnets and subnet MaSKS seiras B 2 Example Using subnets on a Class C IP internet B 3 Example Working with a Class C subnet 0 B 5 DistribUting IP Addresses orisii nieee B 5 Technical note on subnet masking scceeeeeeees B 6 CONTIBUFAUOMxscccscndamacancties binderenssauendudeniuneaseneddes B 7 Manually distributing IP addreSSeS ceceeeeeeeees B 8 Using address Serverside iasa B 8 Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses B 9 Nested IP SUBNG1S crino B 11 Contents ix BIO OO CASS snan a a B 14 Packet header TYPOS sssccaccisncssactsnniandesmedandtaaatsionts B 14 Appendix C Binary Conversion Table
187. ii hex characters VPN Quickview Statistics are displayed on the VPN Quick View screen Main Quick VPN The VPN Quick View screen has been modified slightly in firmware version 7 0 2 Profile Name HA lt gt FA1 Jony Fon HA lt gt FA3 Sleve M My IPsec Tunnel Bangalore Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 21 VPN Quick View Type Rx Pckts Tx Pckts Discard Remote Address ATMP 99 99 173 166 82 8 ATMP 14 63 193 117 91 IPsec 12 0 0 0 0 PPTP 35 1 1 1 1 If the remote tunnel end point is a hostname or 0O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 is displayed until a Security Association is established Previously the remote members network was displayed WAN Event History Error Reporting The following events are logged and displayed in the WAN Event History screen IKE no phi preferences assigned An attempt was made to use an IPsec profile with no IKE profile attached to it IKE DNS lookup failure The DNS lookup of the remote tunnel end point has failed IKE no matching ph1 profile An IKE phase 1 request was received and did not match any of the profiles stored in the local Router IKE no matching proposal IKE phase 1 auth failure An IKE phase 1 request was received and the proposal did not match an allowed parameter or else the remote rejected the local Router s proposal The phase 1 remote authentication failed IKE phase 1 resend timeout The
188. ile a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary f The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service g If trouble is experienced with this equipment the Netopia 3300 Series router for repair or warranty information please contact Netopia Technical Support 510 597 5400 www netopia com If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved h This equipment not intended to be repaired by the end user In case of any problems please refer to the trou bleshooting section of the Product User Manual before calling Netopia Technical Support i Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information j If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this Netopia 3300 Series router does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or qualified installer RF Exposure Statement Note Installation of the wireless models must main
189. iles as well If you are not using NAT your public Internet connection can benefit from sending authenticated RIP packets as well as receiving them To configure RIP 2 MD5 authentication for a Connection Profile you can either change an existing Connection Profile or create a new one The Default Profile Leased and Switched menus are the same as the Connection Profile RIP option and associated menus For brevity the following example shows only the Connection Profile RIP option and associated menus In either case navigate to the RIP Profile Parameters screen under the IP Profile Parameters menu of the Display Change or Add Connection Profile screen Display Change Main WAN IP Profile RIP Profile m or Add y Menu Configuration Connection Profile Parameters Options The connection profile RIP Profile Parameters screen appears 6 16 Firmware User Guide RIP Profile Parameters Receive RIP v2 MD5 Authentication Transmit RIP v2 MD5 multicast TX RIP Policy Poison Reverse RIP v2 Authentication Keys e Receive RIP is always visible Here you select Off v1 v2 Both v1 and v2 or v2 MD5 Authentication from the pull down menu For MD5 authentication you must select v2 MD5 Authentication e If NAT is disabled Transmit RIP is visible Here you select Off v1 v2 broadcast v2 multicast v2 MD5 broadcast or v2 MD5 multicast from the pull down menu For MD
190. ill continue serving from 100 199 with the new IP Address e If you configure the gateway with a subnet smaller than a Class C subnet the gateway will serve all available addresses e If you explicitly configure the DHCP pool auto configuration of the DHCP pool is suppressed e If you configure the gateway manually and you would like the gateway to auto configure DHCP you must explicitly set the IP Address and Subnet Mask to 0 0 0 0 and reboot IP Setup 6 19 If you have configured multiple Ethernet IP subnets the appearance of the IP Address Serving screen is altered slightly IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode DHCP Server Configure Address Pools Serve DHCP Clients DHCP Lease Time Hours DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve BOOTP Clients Serve Dynamic WAN Clients Three menu items are hidden and Configure Address Pools appears instead If you select Configure Address Pools you will be taken to the IP Address Pools screen that allows you to configure an address serving pool for each of the configured Ethernet IP subnets See IP Address Pools on page 6 20 6 20 Firmware User Guide IP Address Pools The IP Address Pools screen allows you to configure a separate IP address serving pool for each of up to eight configured Ethernet IP subnets IP Address Pools Subnet host addrs Ist Client Addr Clients Client Gateway 192 128 117 0 253 192 128 117 196 192 128 117 162 192 129 117 0
191. in WAN Add Connection Configuration Profile Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs _ 5 3 The Add Connection Profile screen appears Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode ATMP PPTP IPsec IP Profile Parameters From the Encapsulation Type pop up menu select IPsec e Then select Encapsulation Options The IPsec Tunnel Options screen appears IPsec Tunnel Options Key Management IKE IKE Phase 1 Profile Encapsulation ESP ESP Encryption Transform DES ESP Authentication Transform HMAC MD5 96 Compression Type None Advanced IPsec Options COMMIT For Key Management you can use either IKE or Manual If you choose Manual skip to IPSec Manual Key Entry on page 5 19 If you choose IKE the default continue below Select IKE Phase 1 Profile and press Return 5 4 Firmware User Guide IKE Phasel Profile lt lt ADD PH1 PROFILE gt gt lt lt NONE gt gt Key Management IKE Phase 1 Profile Encapsulation ESP Encryption Tran ESP Authentication Compression Type Advanced IPsec Opti Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit A pop up window displays a list of IKE Phase 1 Profiles that you have configured If you have not previously configured an IKE Phase 1 Profile the selection ADD PH1 PROFILE allows you
192. initialization complete 01 22 03 BOOT Cold start v8 4 01 22 03 07 IP Route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not installed Clear History Return Enter on event item for details or SCROLL UP DOWN item for scrolling If the event history exceeds the size of the screen you can scroll through it by using SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN To scroll up select SCROLL UP at the top of the list and press Return To scroll down select SCROLL DOWN at the bottom of the list and press Return To obtain more information about any event listed in the Device Event History select the event and then press Return A dialog box containing more information about the selected event appears Press Return or Escape to dismiss the dialog box To clear the Device Event History select Clear History and press Return Monitoring Tools 8 7 IP Routing Table Main Menu Statistics amp Logs gt e IP Routing Table The IP routing table displays all of the IP routes currently known to the Router IP Routing Table via Gateway SCROLL UP 0 0 0 0 255 255 127 0 0 1 Loopback 255 255 192 168 1 1 Ethernet i 255 255 192 168 1 1 Ethernet 5 255 255 192 168 1 15 Ethernet 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 UPDATE The routing table screen represents a snapshot of the routing table information at the time the screen is first invoked To take a new Snapshot select Update at the bottom of the screen
193. ion Add Scheduled Connection Delete Scheduled Connection Return Enter to add a Scheduled Connection Navigate from here to add modify change delete Scheduled Connections Select Add Scheduled Connection and press Return The Add Scheduled Connection screen appears Line Backup 7 13 Add Scheduled Connection Scheduled Connection Enable On How Often Weekly Schedule Type Forced Up Set Weekly Schedule Use Connection Profile ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION CANCEL Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Scheduled Connections dial remote Networks on a Weekly or Once Only basis Toggle Scheduled Connection Enable to On From the How Often pop up menu select Weekly and press Return From the Schedule Type pop up menu accept the default Forced Up and press Return Select Set Weekly Schedule and press Return The Set Weekly Schedule screen appears Set Weekly Schedule Monday Yes Tuesday Yes Wednesday Yes Thursday Yes Friday Yes Saturday Yes Sunday Yes Scheduled Window Start Time 11 27 AM or PM AM Scheduled Window Duration Per Day 24 00 Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Toggle all the days of the week to Yes and set the Scheduled Window Duration Per Day to 24 00 This guarantees a 24X7 connection Press Escape to return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen 7 14 Firmware User Guide e Select Use Connection Profile and press Return A screen dis
194. ion and Firmware Files with TFTP on page 10 6 Restarting the System on page 10 8 Note These utilities and tests are accessible only through the Telnet based management screens See the Getting Started Guide chapter Telnet Based Management for information on accessing the Telnet based management screens You access the Utilities amp Diagnostics screens from the Main Menu Utilities amp Diagnostics Ping Trace Route Telnet Disconnect Telnet Console Session Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Restart System Revert to Factory Defaults 10 2 Firmware User Guide Ping The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 includes a standard Ping test utility A Ping test generates IP packets destined for a particular Ping capable IP host Each time the target host receives a Ping packet it returns a packet to the original sender Ping allows you to see whether a particular IP destination is reachable from the Router You can also ascertain the quality and reliability of the connection to the desired destination by studying the Ping test s statistics In the Utilities amp Diagnostic screen select Ping and press Return The ICMP Ping screen appears Name of Host to Ping Packets to Send Data Size Delay seconds START PING Status Packets Out 0 Packets In 0 Packets Lost 0 0 Round Trip Time Min Max Avg 0 000 0 000 0 000 secs Enter the IP Address Domain Name
195. irmware User Guide What s New in 8 4 New in Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 are the following features e PSec MTU Support See Advanced IPsec Options on page 5 11 TACACS Support See TACACS server authentication on page 9 8 GRE Tunneling Support See About GRE Tunnels on page 4 11 Session Initiation Protocol ALG support setting in the CLI The SIP ALG supports only SIP over UDP not TCP See the Command Line Interface Commands Reference available on the Netopia website 1 2 Firmware User Guide Telnet based Management Telnet based management is a fast menu driven interface for the capabilities built into the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 Telnet oased management provides access to a wide variety of features that the Router supports You can customize these features for your individual setup This chapter describes how to access the Telnet based management screens This section covers the following topics Netopia Telnet Menus on page 1 2 Netopia Models on page 1 3 Connecting through a Telnet Session on page 1 3 Navigating through the Telnet Screens on page 1 4 Netopia Telnet Menus Telnet based management screens contain the main entry points to the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 configuration and monitoring features The entry points are displayed in the Main Menu shown below Netopia 3366 V 8 4 Easy Setup WAN Configuration Syste
196. ist and you will be returned to the Add NAT Server List screen Note In order to use CUSeeMe through the Netopia Router you must export the ports 7648 and 7649 In MultiNat you may use a port range export Without the export CUSeeMe will fail to work This is true unless a static mapping is in place for the host using CUSeeMe In that case no server list entry is necessary Modifying server lists Once a server list exists you can select it for modification or deletion Select Show Change Server List from the Network Address Translation screen 3 18 Firmware User Guide Select the Server List Name you want to modify from the pop up menu and press Return Network Address Translation NAT Server List Name my_ servers A S D A S D A S D Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit The Show Change NAT Server List screen appears Show Change NAT Server List Server List Name my_servers Add Server Show Change Server Delete Server Selecting Show Change Server or Delete Server displays the same pop up menu Multiple Network Address Translation 3 19 Show Change NAT Server List Private Address Public Address Port Se Ad Sh De Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Select any server from the list and press Return The Change NAT Server screen appears Change NAT Server My Exports Service smtp
197. itch This will reset the unit to factory defaults and you will now be able to reprogram your Router Power Outages If you suspect that power was restored after a power outage and the Router is connected to a remote site you may need to switch the Router off and then back on again After temporary power outages a connection that still seems to be up may actually be disconnected Rebooting the gateway should reestablish the connection Technical Support Netopia Inc is committed to providing its customers with reliable products and documentation backed by excellent technical support Before contacting Netopia Look in this guide for a solution to your problem You may find a solution in this troubleshooting appendix or in other sections Check the index for a reference to the topic of concern If you cannot find a solution complete the environment profile below before contacting Netopia Technical Support A 4 Firmware User Guide Environment profile Locate the Router s model number product serial number and firmware version The serial number is on the bottom of the gateway along with the model number The firmware version appears in the Netopia Netopia Router s Main Menu screen Model number Serial number Firmware version What kind of local network s do you have with how many devices Ethernet TCP IP How to reach us We can help you with your problem more effectively if you have completed the environment pro
198. k ranges defined for the IPsec profile Press Escape to return to the Add or Change Connection Profile screen and select IP Profile Parameters If you enable IKE key management the IP Profile Parameters screen appears IP Profile Parameters Remote Tunnel Endpoint 0 0 0 0 Add Network Address Translation Enabled Filter Set lt lt None gt gt Remove Filter Set Advanced IP Profile Options COMMIT The Remote Tunnel Endpoint field accepts either an IP address in the familiar dotted quad notation a b c d or a hostname to be resolved using the Domain Name System DNS Multiple Network IPsec Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers an enhancement to IPsec VPN tunnels allowing multiple network support This feature enhances your Netopia Router s Virtual Private Networking functionality This feature allows you to define many local and remote network ranges for a given IPsec VPN profile Each of these ranges has its own IPsec tunnel However each tunnel has a common tunneling endpoint and encryption policy This is useful for example for branch office management of multiple IP subnets over an encrypted VPN tunnel The following diagram illustrates this feature 5 14 Firmware User Guide subnet 192 168 1 1 24 ph2 SA1 Gea cee Netopia Mpa a riad aaa cet inten shine Sit T arra ae aaa J remote Itep 163 176 91 1 ISAKMP SA phase 1 Itep 163 176 91 2 router subnet 10 0 0 0 8 gi lo addr
199. ld allows this path to be resolved e You can specify an Idle Timeout seconds value The idle timeout tells the Router that if no traffic passes through the tunnel for the specified number of seconds no automatic SA re key should be performed When new traffic does pass through the tunnel the idle timeout interval resets again when the current SAs expire If you set the value to zero the Router will re key the SA whenever the SA Lifetime interval specifies regardless of whether traffic is passing through it or not This will effectively nail up the tunnel 5 18 Firmware User Guide IPsec WAN Configuration Screens You can also configure IKE Phase 1 Profiles in the WAN Configuration menus Main IKE Phase 1 Menu WAN Configuration Configuration The WAN Configuration screen now includes IKE Phase 1 Configuration as shown WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup ATM Circuits Configuration Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile WAN Default Profile IKE Phase 1 Configuration Advanced Connection Options Establish WAN Connection Disconnect WAN Connection Return Enter for WAN Line configuration From here you will configure yours and the remote sites WAN information Select IKE Phase 1 Configuration and press Return The IKE Phase 1 Configuration screen appears Internet Key Exchange IKE IP
200. ld be able to successfully route packets when the Router doesn t know how to route to the intended recipient s IP address Typically a default gateway is the ISP s gateway If a backup gateway is available select Backup IP Gateway and enter the IP address of a gateway that you want to use for backup in the event of a connection failure See Backup Default Gateway on page 7 14 for configuration details Select Primary Domain Name Server and enter the IP address for a domain name server The domain name server matches the alphabetic addresses favored by people for example robin hood com to the IP addresses actually used by IP gateways for example 163 7 8 202 If a secondary DNS server is available select Secondary Domain Name Server and enter its IP address The secondary DNS server is used by the Router when the primary DNS server is inaccessible Entering a secondary DNS is useful but not necessary Select Domain Name and enter your network s domain name for example netopia com Netopia strongly recommends that you enter a domain name Routing Information Protocol RIP is needed if there are IP routers on other segments of your Ethernet network that the Router needs to recognize If this is the case select RIP Options and press Return This will take you to the Ethernet LAN RIP options screen where you can configure several parameters including RIP v2 MD5 Authentication See RIP 2 MD5 Authentication on page 6 10
201. lem can be determined and until repair has been made If this is not done the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures if such changes affect the compatibility or use of this device the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC If the telephone company requests information on what equipment is connected to their lines inform them of a The telephone number to which this unit is connected b The ringer equivalence number 0 XB c The USOC jack required RJ11C d The FCC Registration Number XXXUSA XXXXX XX E Items b and d are indicated on the label The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine how many devices can be connected to your telephone line In most areas the sum of the REN s of all devices on any one line should not exceed five 5 0 If too many devices are attached they may not ring properly FCC Statements a This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company D 6 Firmware User Guide b List all applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes USOC
202. lly issue an address to a computer it possesses that address until you manually remove it That s why manually distributed addresses are called static addresses Static addresses are useful in cases when you want to make sure that a host on your network cannot have its address taken away by the address server Appropriate candidates for a static address include a network administrator s computer a computer dedicated to communicating with the Internet and gateways Using address serving The Router provides three ways to serve IP addresses to computers on a network The first Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is supported by PCs with Microsoft Windows and a TCP IP stack Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers using the UNIX operating system may also be able to use DHCP The second way MacIP is for Macintosh computers The third way called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients IPCP is used to fulfill WAN client requirements The Router can use both DHCP and MacIP Whether you use one or both depends on your particular networking environment If that environment includes both PCs and Macintosh computers that do not use Open Transport you need to use both DHCP and MaclP to distribute IP addresses to all of your computers Serve dynamic WAN clients The third method used to fulfill WAN client requirements is called Serve Dynamic WAN Clients The correct term or protocol is a subset of the PPP suite call IPCP Originally this w
203. ly launched whenever you run a TCP IP application such as a web browser or email client When you first run the application a Connect To dialog box appears in which you enter your User name and Password If you check the Save password checkbox the system will remember your User name and Password and you won t be prompted for them again Allowing VPNs through a Firewall An administrator interested in securing a network will usually combine the use of VPNs with the use of a firewall or some similar mechanism This is because a VPN is not a complete security solution but rather a component of overall security Using a VPN will add security to transactions carried over a public network but a VPN alone will not prevent a public network from infiltrating a private network Therefore you should combine use of a firewall with VPNs where the firewall will secure the private network from infiltration from a public network and the VPN will secure the transactions that must cross the public network A strict firewall may not be provisioned to allow VPN traffic to pass back and forth as needed In order to ensure that a firewall will allow a VPN certain attributes must be added to the firewall s provisioning The provisions necessary vary slightly between ATMP and PPTP but both protocols operate on the same basic premise there are control and negotiation operations and there is the tunnelled traffic that carries the payload of data between the VPN endpoi
204. m Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Quick Menus Quick View The Easy Setup menus display and permit changing the values contained in the default connection profile You can use Easy Setup to initially configure the Router directly through a Telnet session Easy Setup menus contain up to five descendant screens for viewing or altering these values The number of screens depends on whether you have optional features installed The Quickstart Guide describes the Easy Setup menus to get you up and running quickly The WAN Configuration menu displays and permits changing your connection profile s Virtual Private Networks VPNs and default profile creating or deleting additional connection profiles and configuring or reconfiguring the manner in which you may be using the Router to connect to more than one service Introduction 1 3 provider or remote site See WAN Configuration beginning on page 2 1 See also Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNs e The System Configuration menus display and permit changing e IP Setup e Filter Sets e IP Address Serving e Network Address Translation NAT e Date and Time e SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol e Security e Upgrade Feature Set e Change Device to a Bridge e Logging and more See System Configuration Screens beginning on page 2 22 e The Utilities amp Diagnostics menus provide a selection of the various
205. m Configuration menu The System Configuration menu is always available to all users Based on access level the System Configuration menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram Security 9 13 User Access Level ee LAN IP Setup NAT Filter Sets LAN IP Address Serving NAT Network Address Translation NAT Global Date and Time All Console Configuration Superuser SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Superuser All Security All Upgrade Feature Set Superuser Change Device to a Bridge All Logging se this screen if you want options beyond Easy Setup Note Network Address Translation NAT is displayed in this screen in order to make access control simpler Security becomes Change Access Password for non Superusers and provides access to the associated menu described previously IP Setup menu In the IP Setup menu users that do not have LAN Subnet Configuration access will see a screen similar to the following IP Setup LAN IP Subnet is 192 168 1 1 24 9 14 Firmware User Guide Utilities amp Diagnostics menu Based on access level the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu displays its configuration options according to the following diagram User Access Level m Global Ping Global Trace Route Global Telnet All Log off Serial Console Session Global Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP All Restart System Revert to Fac
206. me Random Retry which operates as follows First it will wait O to 6O seconds before starting then it will try three times to bring the connection up as quickly as possible Second on each successive retry after these first three attempts it will wait a random number of seconds between zero and a user specified maximum Should the connection come up and subsequently go down the Scheduled Connection will start over with three retries Switched connections have a variable redial back off time depending on the interface type Consequently the first three attempts for such connections will be slower Once the connection is up it will be forced to remain up If How Often is set to Weekly the item directly below How Often reads Set Weekly Schedule If How Often is set to Once Only the item directly below How Often reads Set Once Only Schedule Set Weekly Schedule If you set How Often to Weekly select Set Weekly Schedule and go to the Set Weekly Schedule screen e Select the days for the scheduled connection to occur and toggle them to Yes Set Weekly Schedule Monday No Tuesday Wednesday No Thursday No Friday No Saturday No Sunday No Scheduled Window Start Time 04 29 AM or PM AM Scheduled Window Duration Per Day 00 00 Retry interval minutes Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection You must e
207. menu offers the possible data link encapsulation methods for connection profiles used for a variety of purposes PPP RFC1483 ATMP PPTP IPsec or L2TP 2 10 Firmware User Guide Multiple Data Link Encapsulation Settings 4 Select Encapsulation Options and press Return If you selected ATMP PPTP L2TP or IPSec see Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNs If you selected PPP or RFC1483 the screen offers different options Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type I a si icy i i ee a ep RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 Routed 1483 IP Profile Parameters Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type PPP Underlying Encapsulation None PPP Mode vc Multiplexed Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary COMMIT CANCEL COMMIT CANCEL configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit e Ifyou selected RFC1483 the screen allows you If you selected PPP the screen allows you to to choose Bridged 1483 or Routed 1483 choose PPPoE or None as the Underlying Encapsulation e If you choose None the PPP Mode offers the choice of VC Multiplexed or LLC SNAP If you are using PPP when you select Encapsulation Options the Datalink PPP MP Options screen appears RFC1483 does not require these options and does not offer the menu
208. n appears The parameters in this screen are set in the same way as the ones in the Add Filter screen see Adding filters to a filter set on page 9 26 Security 9 29 Change Filter Enabled No Forward No Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type Source Port Compare No Compare Source Port ID 0 Dest Port Compare No Compare Dest Port ID 0 Enter the IP specific information for this filter Deleting filters To delete a filter select Delete Input Filter or Delete Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen to display a table of filters Select the filter from the table and press Return to delete it Press Escape to exit the table without deleting the filter Moving filters To reorganize the filters in a filter set select Move Input Filter or Move Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen to display a table of filters Select a filter from the table and press Return Then use the up or down arrow key to change the filter s order in the filter set Press Return to accept the new filter location Deleting a filter set Note If you delete a filter set all of the filters it contains are deleted as well To reuse any of these filters in another set before deleting the current filter set you ll have to note their configuration and then recreate them To delete a filter set select Delete Filter Set in the Filter Sets scree
209. n inactivity timer whose expiration will terminate the tunnel A value of zero disables the timer Because tunnels are subject to abrupt termination when the underlying datalink is torn down use of the Idle Timeout is strongly encouraged e Return to the Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape e Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return In the Profile Parameters screen enter the Remote IP Address and Remote IP Mask for the host to which you want to tunnel Press Escape to return to the Connection Profile screen Select COMMIT and press Return The tunnel Connection Profile will be activated Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 11 About GRE Tunnels Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE protocol is another form of tunneling that Netopia routers support A GRE tunnel is brought up when a valid GRE profile is installed and brought down when the profile is disabled or deleted GRE tunnels are not connection based but rather are installed and simply wait for GRE packets There is no special startup initiation as with PPPoE or PPTP GRE is best adapted to simple routing and or tunneling and is not for use with any sensitive data GRE offers no encryption and authentication of data integrity is limited to checksum verification if enabled To set up a GRE tunnel you create a Connection Profile including the IP address and other relevant information for the remote partner Main WAN Add Connection Menu i Configuration
210. n to display a list of filter sets Select a filter set from the list and press Return Select CONTINUE and press Return to delete it A sample filter set This section contains the settings for a filter set called Basic Firewall which is part of the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 s factory configuration 9 30 Firmware User Guide Basic Firewall blocks undesirable traffic originating from the WAN in most cases the Internet but forwards all traffic originating from the LAN It follows the conservative that which is not expressly permitted is prohibited approach unless an incoming packet expressly matches one of the constituent input filters it will not be forwarded to the LAN The five input filters and one output filter that make up Basic Firewall are shown in the table below Setting Input filter Inputfilter Inputfilter Inputfilter Input filter Output 1 2 3 4 5 filter 1 Enabled Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Forward No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Source IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address Source IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address mask Dest IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address Dest IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address mask Protocol type TCP TCP ICMP TCP UDP 0 Source port No No N A No No N A comparison Compare Compare Compare Compare Source port ID O 0 N A 0 0 N A Dest port Equal Equal N A G
211. nd press Return The IPsec Tunnel Options screen appears 5 10 Firmware User Guide IPsec Tunnel Options Key Management IKE IKE Phase 1 Profile Encapsulation ESP ESP Encryption Transform ESP Authentication Transform Advanced IPsec Options COMMIT The Key Management pop up menu at the top of the IPsec Tunnel Options screen allows you to choose between IKE key management the default for a new IPsec profile and Manual key management If you select Manual the IKE Phase 1 Profile option does not display and you must enter your IPSec Manual Keys under the IPsec Manual Keys screen See IPsec Manual Key Entry on page 19 e The IKE Phase 1 Profile pop up menu allows you to associate an IKE Phase 1 Profile with the IPsec tunnel An IKE Phase 1 Profile specifies the set of parameters that will be used for the IKE Phase 1 exchange IKE Phase 1 Profiles may be shared by multiple IPsec tunnels The pop up menu item displays the name of the currently associated IKE Phase 1 Profile if any or is blank if no IKE Phase 1 profile is associated with the tunnel The pop up menu lists the names of all currently defined IKE Phase 1 Profiles The pop up menu also includes an lt lt ADD PH1 PROFILE gt gt item to allow you to define a new IKE Phase 1 Profile directly without first going to the IPsec Configuration screen and a lt lt NONE gt gt item to allow you to dissociate an existing IKE Phase 1 Profile from the I
212. network protocol is the Internet Protocol also known as IP Like many other protocols IP uses packets or formatted chunks of data to communicate In packets a header is part of the envelope information that surrounds the actual data being transmitted In e mail a header is usually the address and routing information found at the top of messages Note This guide uses the term IP in a very general and inclusive way to identify all of the following e Networks that use the Internet Protocol along with accompanying protocols such as TCP UDP and ICMP e Packets that include an IP header within their structure e Devices that send IP packets About IP Addressing Every networking protocol uses some form of addressing in order to ensure that packets are delivered correctly In IP individual network devices that are initial sources and final destinations of packets are usually called hosts instead of nodes but the two terms are interchangeable Each host on an IP network must have a unique IP address An IP address also called an Internet address is a 32 bit number usually expressed as four decimal numbers separated by periods Each decimal number in an IP address represents a 1 byte 8 bit binary number Thus values for each of the four numbers range from 00000000 to 11111111 in binary notation or from O to 255 in decimal notation The expression 192 168 1 1 is a typical example of an IP address IP addresses indicate both the identity o
213. nformation for the remote PPTP partner You use the same procedure to initiate a PPTP tunnel that terminates at a remote PPTP server or to terminate a tunnel initiated by a remote PPTP client PPTP configuration To set up the Router as a PPTP Network Server PNS capable of answering PPTP tunnel requests you must also configure the VPN Default Answer Profile See ATMP PPTP Default Profile on page 4 18 for more information PPTP is a Datalink Encapsulation option in Connection Profiles It is not an option in device or link configuration screens as PPTP is not a native encapsulation Consequently the Easy Setup Profile does not offer PPTP datalink encapsulation See the Creating a New Connection Profile on page 2 9 for information on creating Connection Profiles Channel 4 and higher events such as connections and disconnections reported in the WAN Event Histories are VPN tunnel events To define a PPTP tunnel navigate to the Add Connection Profile menu from the Main Menu Main WAN Add Connection Menu i Configuration Profile Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 2 Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Underlying Encapsulation Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 5 When you define a Connection Profile as using PPTP by selecting PPTP as the datalink encapsulation method and then select Dat
214. ng Remote Access Privileges Custom Telnet Server Port 23 Device Web Server via LAN only Yes LAN Ethernet IP Filter Set Remove Filter Set Configuration is similar to RADIUS server configuration An additional toggle option TACACS Accounting allows you to enable or disable the TACACS Accounting services feature Note If the user is authenticated by a TACACS server and TACACS Accounting is enabled the session is switched into Command Line Interface CLI mode see the Command Line Interface Commands Reference and cannot be switched to console mode If TACACS Accounting is enabled on the Netopia Router each command is sent to the TACACS server in a TACACS Accounting transaction The CLI command is then executed regardless of the return code from the server User access password Users must be able to change their names and passwords regardless of other security access restrictions If a user does not have security access then they will only be able to modify the password for their account When a limited access user logs into the gateway and accesses the System Configuration menus the only Security option displayed is Change Access Password Security 9 9 System Configuration IP Setup Filter Sets IP Address Serving Network Address Translation NAT Date and Time Console Configuration Change Access Password Upgrade Feature Set Logging Use this screen if you want op
215. ng IP Passthrough DHCP Enabled to Yes displays the IP Passthrough DHCP MAC address field This is an editable field in which you can enter the MAC hardware address of the designated PC be used as the DHCP Client Identifier for dynamic address reservation The MAC address must be six colon delimited or dash delimited sets of hex digits O FF First Come First Serve Mode Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 IP Passthrough allows a first come first serve mode NAT Options defaults to an all zeroes MAC address If you leave the default all zeroes MAC address the Router will select the next DHCP client that initiates a DHCP lease request or renewal to be the IP passthrough host When the WAN comes up or if it is already up the Router will serve this client the IP passthrough WAN address When this client s lease ends the IP passthrough address becomes available for the next client to initiate a DHCP transaction The next client will get the IP passthrough address Note that there is no way to control which PC has the IP passthrough address without releasing all other DHCP leases on the LAN Note If you specify a non zeroes MAC address the DHCP Client Identifier must be in the format specified above Macintosh computers allow the DHCP Client Identifier to be entered as a name or text however Netopia routers accept only strict binary hex MAC address format Macintosh computers display their strict MAC addresses in the TCP IP Control Panel Classic M
216. ng a New Connection POTN sicisccin ces siecddecencearscnecennane 2 9 Advanced Connection Options ccssceceececeeeeeeeeees 2 14 Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection 2 14 Scheduled Connection iisen 2 15 Backup COnfSUratiOn scsicsincssevesncecednedsscurssscseruneuis 2 20 Priority QUEUING TOS Dit cscssicciessccanistenieeceeeaieans 2 20 System Configuration Screens sscsscsscssesscseeescoseees 2 22 System configuration features ccseeeseseeeeeneees 2 22 IPOS CTU E E A A E E 2 23 Filter SOUS sasni 2 23 IP ACGME SS Serving saasnsnecansdeednorrederensmesneedensesateas 2 23 Network Address Translation NAT csseeceeees 2 23 Stateful INSPSCON scoccdcasccescecavewsatensewenseanaeenseans 2 23 Date and UME sesaria sterietectems 2 29 Wireless configurati O Mearsi 2 30 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 2 36 E Se NT AN APEA AEE A A A AT 2 36 Upgrade Feature Set ccccsscsscssccsccessscceseneoees 2 36 Change Device to a Bridge sscssssscssssseeeeees 2 37 iv Firmware User Guide LOBBING eerer rere reece rrr cere rrr errr cre rrr errr rer terre rr 2 38 Chapter 3 Multiple Network Address Translation 3 1 OVEN VICW cxsiztecied snena a 3 1 Feature S inana EAEAN 3 2 S pported WANG sss spieda nE 3 5 Support for AOL Instant Messenger AIM File EE E E A A E 3 5 Support for Yahoo MeSSENET cescescssceeeeseeees 3 6 MURINAT GOnPSUNET ON sxicssse
217. ng this to No disabled specifically denies access from this MAC address Select ADD WIRELESS MAC NOW and press Return 2 36 Firmware User Guide Your entry will be added to a list of up to 32 authorized addresses To display the list of authorized MAC addresses select Display Change MAC Addresses from the Authorized Wireless MAC Addresses menu The list is displayed as shown below 00 0a 27 ae 71 a4 Allowed 00 0b 28 af 72 b5 Allowed 00 0c 29 bd 69 b3 Blocked Select an address to modify You can continue to Add Change or Delete addresses to the list by selecting the respective menu options SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol These screens allow you to monitor and configure your network by means of a standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent e Details are given in Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP on page 8 10 Security These screens allow you to add users and define passwords on your network 7 e Details are given in Security on page 9 1 Upgrade Feature Set You can upgrade your Netopia Router by adding new feature sets through the Upgrade Feature Set utility See the release notes that came with your Router or feature set upgrade or visit the Netopia Web site at www netopia com for information on new feature sets how to obtain them and how to install them on your Router WAN and System Configuration 2 37 Change Device to a Bridge For Netopia DSL Routers
218. nnel Transport mode encrypts only the data portion payload of each packet but leaves the header untouched Tunnel mode encrypts both the header and the payload On the receiving side an IPSec compliant device decrypts each packet Netopia Routers support Tunnel mode DES stands for Data Encryption Standard a popular symmetric key encryption method DES uses a 56 bit key Netopia Routers offer IPsec 3DES triple DES encryption as a standard option Internet Key Exchange IKE is an authentication and encryption key management protocol used in conjunction with the IPsec standard IKE is a two phase protocol for key exchange e Phase 1 authenticates the security gateways and establishes the Security Parameters SPs they will use to negotiate on behalf of the clients Security Associations SAs are sets of information values that allow the two devices on the Internet to communicate securely e Phase 2 establishes the tunnel and provides for secure transport of data IPsec can be configured without IKE but IKE offers additional features flexibility and ease of configuration Key exchange between your local Router and a remote point can be configured either manually or by using the key exchange protocol 5 2 Firmware User Guide The advantage of using IKE is that it automatically negotiates IPsec Security Associations and enables IPsec secure communications without having to manually enter the lengthy encryption keys at both ends of the
219. nter the time in the format H M where H is a one or two digit number representing the hour and M is a one or two digit number representing the minutes The colon is mandatory For example the entry 1 3 or 1 03 would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o clock The entry 7 0 or 7 00 would be accepted as seven o clock exactly The entries 44 5 and 2 would be rejected Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM from the pop up menu WAN and System Configuration 2 19 Select Scheduled Window Duration Per Day and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled connection per call Retry interval minutes becomes visible if you have selected Random Retry This option allows you to set the upper limit for the number of minutes to use for the retry time the attempts after the first three attempts It accepts values of 1 255 minutes the default setting is 5 minutes With a setting of 5 minutes it will try every O 300 seconds after the first three retries to bring up the connection You are finished configuring the weekly options Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue Set Once Only Schedule If you set How Often to Once Only select Set Once Only Schedule and go to the Set Once Only Schedule screen Set Once Only Schedule Place Call on MM DD YY 05 07 1998 Scheduled Window Start Time 11 50 AM or PM AM Scheduled Window Duration 00 00 Select Place Call On Date and enter a date in
220. nts The difference is that ATMP uses UDP to handle control and negotiation while PPTP uses TCP Then both ATMP and PPTP use GRE to carry the payload Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 25 For PPTP negotiation to work TCP packets inbound and outbound destined for port 1723 must be allowed Likewise for ATMP negotiation to work UDP packets inbound and outbound destined for port 5150 must be allowed Source ports are dynamic so if possible make this flexible too Additionally PPTP and ATMP both require a firewall to allow GRE bi directionally The following sections illustrate a sample filtering setup to allow either PPTP or ATMP traffic to cross a firewall PPTP example on page 4 26 ATMP example on page 4 28 Make your own appropriate substitutions For more information on filters and firewalls see Chapter 9 Security 4 26 Firmware User Guide PPTP example To enable a firewall to allow PPTP traffic you must provision the firewall to allow inbound and outbound TCP packets specifically destined for port 1723 The source port may be dynamic so often it is not useful to apply a compare function upon this portion of the control negotiation packets You must also set the firewall to allow inbound and outbound GRE packets enabling transport of the tunnel payload From the Main Menu navigate to Display Change IP Filter Set and from the pop up menu select Basic Firewall Main System Filter Display
221. o Yes You can toggle it to No if you want to disable it later Encapsulation Type From the pull down menu select the encapsulation type Usually for modem dial up connections this will be PPP but you can also select ATMP PPTP or IPsec for VPN connections These are the options needed for dial up Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Assuming you selected PPP new fields appear Add Connection Profile Profile Name Modem Backup Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type PPP Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Telco Options COMMIT Line Backup Underlying Encapsulation and PPP Mode do not usually need to be changed for a PPP connection From the Interface Group pull down menu select Backup Select Encapsulation Options 7 4 Firmware User Guide The Datalink PPP MP Options screen appears Datalink PPP MP Options Data Compression rd LZS Send Authentication Send User Name Send Password Receive User Name Receive Password Dial on Demand PAP Password protection is used Passwords are exchanged in clear text e Data Compression should remain set to Standard LZS e Usually you use PAP Authentication with a dial up connection but you can also use CHAP or None For PAP Authentication you enter your User Name and Password and a User N
222. o associate an IP filter set with the Ethernet WAN port See About Filters and Filter Sets on page 9 17 e Remove Filter Set allows you to remove a previously associated filter set Enable PPP over Ethernet is Off by default If your service provider uses PPPoE authentication toggle this to On WAN and System Configuration 2 3 The WAN Ethernet Speed Setting is now configurable via a pop up menu Options are Auto Negotiation the default 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex and 10 Mbps Half Duplex This may be useful in mixed networks where multiple routers have different ethernet speed capability If you want to maintain a single speed setting for compatibility with multiple routers on your LAN you can select a speed duplex combination that all of your routers can match The Wan Ethernet MAC Address is the hardware address of the Netopia device Some service providers require a specific MAC address as part of their authentication process In such a case you can enter the MAC address that your service provider requires If your service provider doesn t use this method you don t need to change this field The DHCP Client Mode setting depends on the type of access concentrator equipment your service provider uses Most use Standards Based Alternatively your provider may instruct you to select Copper Mountain Specific The RIP Options selection displays the WAN Ethernet RIP Parameters screen
223. o the Netopia Router for delivery back to the client The agent then sends the response to the client on behalf of the DHCP server This process is transparent to the client which doesn t know that it is communicating through an intermediary rather than directly to a local server Using DHCP relay it is possible to centralize the configuration information for the host computers at many remote sites at a single location easing the burden of administering configuration management for remote sites To configure the Netopia Router to act as a DHCP relay agent from the Main Menu navigate to the System Configuration menu IP Setup 6 29 Main System IP Address Menu Configuration Serving Select IP Address Serving and press Return The IP Address Serving screen appears IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode Disabled DHCP Server Number of Client IP Addresses DHCP Relay Agent lst Client Address Client Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Serve DHCP Clients Yes DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve BOOTP Clients Yes Select IP Address Serving Mode The pop up menu offers the choices of Disabled DHCP Server the default and DHCP Relay Agent If you select DHCP Relay Agent and press Return the screen changes as shown below 6 30 Firmware User Guide IP Address Serving IP Address Serving Mode DHCP Relay Agent Relay Server 1 10 1 1 1 Relay Server 2 20 1 1 1 Relay Server 3 30 1 1 1
224. occurring when Ethernet packets are transmitted simultaneously by nodes on the LAN Monitoring Tools 8 9 System Information The System Information screen gives a summary view of the general system level values in the Router From the Statistics amp Logs menu select System Information The System Information screen appears System Information Serial Number f 70 00 16740352 Firmware Version 8 4 ModelNumber Processor Speed Mhz Flash Rom Capacity MBytes DRAM Capacity MBytes Hardware Acceleration Not Installed Ethernet Single 10 100 Port WAN Interface ADSL The information display varies by model firmware version feature set and so on You can tell at a glance your particular system configuration 8 10 Firmware User Guide Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 includes a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP agent allowing monitoring and configuration by a standard SNMP manager Netopia Routers now support SNMP V1 and SNMP V2c SNMP Heartbeat Trap Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 implements a new enterprise specific SNMP trap called the heartbeat trap This has been added to the SNMP MIB file npaV2trap mib This trap supports the Netopia NetOctopus network monitoring tool When enabled this trap is periodically sent to a management station to confirm that the connection between the device and the management station is still active Note that the serialNumber
225. of Dial Up Server vs NT 3 5 Internet r Advanced options T Log on to network I Enable software compression I Require encrypted password Allowed network protocols P NetBEUI I IPX SPX Compatible M ICPAP TCP IP Settings omea Windows 95 users select PPP Windows 95 Windows NT 3 5 Internet e Windows 98 users select PPP Windows 98 Windows NT Server Internet In the Allowed network protocols area check TCP IP and uncheck all of the other checkboxes Note Netopia s PPTP implementation does not currently support tunnelling of IPX and NetBEUI protocols 4 24 Firmware User Guide 4 Click the TCP IP Settings button TCP IP Settings x Server assigned IP address Specify an IP address Paddress Server assigned name server addresses Specify name server addresses Bimar DNs Cn oe Ta I wo IV Use IP header compression IV Use default gateway on remote network nw 3 amp e If your ISP uses dynamic IP addressing DHCP select the Server assigned IP address radio button e If your ISP uses static IP addressing select the Specify an IP address radio button and enter your assigned IP address in the fields provided Also enter the IP address in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields 5 Click the OK button in this window and the next two windows Connecting using Dial Up Networking A Dial Up Networking connection will be automatical
226. of local member addresses requires firewall rules to be installed on the WAN interface These must prevent packets coming in through that interface with local member source addresses since local member source addresses should only originate from the LAN Otherwise it is theoretically possible for a malicious hacker to send packets through the tunnel by impersonating local member IP addresses See the chapter Security on page 9 1 for more information Traffic originating from local member LAN addresses that is not addressed to remote member addresses as well as traffic originating from local LAN IP addresses that do not match any local member specifications is routed using the normal routing table This means that if you want to restrict traffic from local members from going out to the Internet and force it all to go through one or more tunnels you need to specify remote members of 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or 0 0 0 0 0 Traffic originating from the gateway for example Telnet ping DNS queries will not use the default VPN definition even if the source addresses match Traffic to and from the gateway is included in specific VPNs Internet Key Exchange IKE Configuration IPsec tunnels are defined in the same manner as PPTP tunnels See Virtual Private Networks VPNs on page 4 1 for more information You configure the Connection Profile as follows From the Main Menu navigate to WAN Configuration and then Add Connection Profile Ma
227. on key or a negative start date end date or start time and end time range Changes to RIP Keys on all interfaces are immediately effective This differs from the remainder of the RIP configuration on the Ethernet LAN which requires a reboot It is important that the keys be able to change dynamically however because the purpose of entering more than one key on an interface is to insure a smooth transition between keys with no network outages Changing or deleting a key You change or delete a key by selecting it from a pop up menu In the RIP v2 Authentication Keys menu select Display Change Key RIP v2 Authentication Keys Key ID Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Valid 10 10 2002 12 00 AM Infinite 255 3 11 2000 3 17 PM 8 6 2002 1 24 AM Delete Key Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Note The date and time formats are determined by the system date and time formats If the current date and time fall within the range of dates and times the Valid field indicates yes otherwise it indicates no You modify the Change Key menu in the same way as in the Add Key menu see Adding a key on page 13 If you select Delete Key a pop up menu will ask you to confirm your choice IP Setup 6 15 Are you sure you want to delete this RIP MD5 Key CONTINUE Connection Profiles and Default Profile RIP 2 MD5 authentication may be configured in Connection Prof
228. on how to use the Ping utility If you can successfully Ping hosts using their IP addresses but not their domain names 198 34 7 1 but not garcia netopia com for example verify that the DNS server s IP address is correct and that it is reachable from the Router use Ping e Ifyou are using filters check that your filter sets are not blocking the type of connections you are trying to make Local routing problems Observe the Ethernet LEDs to see if data traffic flow appears to be normal e Check the WAN statistics and LAN statistics screens to see more specific information on data traffic flow and address serving See Statistics amp Logs on page 8 4 for more information Troubleshooting A 3 How to Reset the Router to Factory Defaults Lose your password This section shows how to reset the Netopia Router so that you can access the configuration screens once again Note Keep in mind that all of your settings will need to be reconfigured If you don t have a password the only way to access the Netopia Router is the following 1 Referring to the diagram below find the round Reset Switch opening Example Netopia Router back panel AL je g E Epp Ff Factory Reset Switch Push to clear all settings Carefully insert the point of a pen or an unwound paperclip into the opening Press this sw
229. on of these features Port Address Translation The simplest form of classic Network Address Translation is PAT Port Address Translation PAT allows a group of computers on a LAN such as might be found in a home or small office to share a single Internet connection using one IP address The computers on the LAN can surf the Web read e mail download files etc but their individual IP addresses are never exposed to the public network Instead a single IP address acts as the source IP address of traffic originating from the LAN The Netopia Router allows you to define multiple PAT mappings which can be individually mapped to different public IP addresses This offers more control over the access permitted to users on the LAN A limitation of PAT is that communication must be initiated from the internal network A user on the external side cannot access a machine behind a PAT connection A PAT enhancement is the ability to define multiple PAT mappings Each of these can optionally map to a section or range of IP addresses of the internal network PAT mapping allows only internal users to initiate traffic flow between the internal and external networks Server lists Server lists sometimes known as exported services make it possible to provide access from the public network to hosts on the LAN Server lists allow you to define particular services such as Web ftp or e mail which are available via a public IP address You define the type of se
230. onfiguration Service providers and network administrators can now limit the access of other users to the various configuration screens to prevent misconfigurations The access privileges of various users that may be assigned are governed by a Superuser administrative account The Superuser can assign different privileges to Limited users who will be accessing the gateway functions in some way Configuration access names and passwords are specified in the Security Options screen From the Main Menu select System Configuration then Security Security j System Main y y Security Options Menu Configuration The Security Options screen appears Security Options UPnP Enabled on reboot Superuser Configuration Advanced Security Options Configuration Management UPnP Support UPnP Enabled Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a set of protocols that allows a PC to automatically discover other UPnP devices anything from an internet gateway device to a light switch retrieve an XML description of the device and its services control the device and subscribe to real time event notification By default UPnP is enabled on the Netopia Gateway For Windows XP users the automatic discovery feature places an icon representing the Netopia Gateway automatically in the My Network Places folder Security 9 3 PCs using UPnP can retrieve the Gateway s WAN IP address and au
231. onfiguration The Add Access Name Password and Show Change Access Name Passwords screens allow you to select which configuration features a limited non Superuser user can access From the Security Options screen select Add Access Name Password The Add Access Name Password screen appears Add Access Name Password Name 19 characters max Password kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Telnet Access Enabled Web Access Enabled Access Privileges ADD USER Assign a User Name and Password and enable or disable Telnet and Web access as in the Superuser Configuration screen Select Access Privileges and from the pull down menu choose which access privilege you want this user to have All LAN or WAN If you assign any of these privileges limited users will have full access to privileges associated with these interfaces You can customize these privileges further in order to limit access to only certain portions of those interfaces configuration by selecting Custom If you select Custom the Access Privileges Custom screen appears Security 9 5 Access Privileges Custom WAN Data Configuration Connection Profile Configuration Circuit PVC DLCI Configuration LAN Data Configuration LAN Subnet Configuration NAT Filters Configuration Preferences Global Configuration Voice Configuration You can toggle the default user privileges for each user The defaults are set to minimize the possibility of an indi
232. onfiguration via TFTP The configurations that are saved will persist across a Factory Default soft or NMI The gateway will reboot with a Factory Defaulted configuration as usual but the saved configurations are still available for use You save your configurations in the Configuration Management screen in the Security menus Security Options Enable Telnet Console Access Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens Console Access timeout seconds Superuser Configuration Configuration Management Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Select Configuration Management and press Return The Configuration Management screen appears Security 9 43 Configuration Management Save Current Configuration as Replace Existing Conifiguration Boot from a Configuration Delete a Configuration Select Save Current Configuration as and press Return The Save Current Configuration screen appears Save Current Configuration Configuration Name HappyInternet SAVE CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Enter a descriptive name for your current configuration select SAVE and press Return Your configuration will be saved to the flash memory and you will be returned to the Configuration Management screen If you choose to run one of your stored configurations you can select it from a pop up menu If you select Boot from a Configuration and select a dif
233. onsole Configuration SNMP Setup Limited user Quick Menu IP Setup IP Address Serving Setup Filter Sets Static Routes Network Address Translation Console Configuration This menu allows you to visit most configuration screens Note Console Configuration is always visible ATM Circuits Configuration menu You select ATM Circuits Configuration from the WAN Configuration menu Main Menu WAN Configuration ATM Circuits Configuration 9 16 Firmware User Guide The ATM Circuits Configuration menu screen appears as follows ATM Circuits Configuration Display Change WAN 1 Circuit Add WAN 1 Circuit Delete WAN 1 Circuit Display Change WAN 2 Circuit Add WAN 2 Circuit Delete WAN 2 Circuit Note Multiple ATM circuit configuration is supported on multiple ATM capable gateways Although some of the parameters of the Circuit Configuration screens pertain to Voice and Connection Profiles it is assumed that if the user has been granted PVC configuration access they are permitted configuration access to all PVC parameters Telnet Access Telnet is a TCP IP service that allows remote terminals to access hosts on an IP network Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports Telnet access to its configuration screens Caution You should consider password protecting or restricting Telnet access to the Router if you suspect there is a chance of tampering To password
234. or an arbitrary client identifier For more information on client identifiers see RFC 2131 section 9 14 Configuring the IP Address Server options To access the enhanced DHCP server functions from the Main Menu navigate to Statistics amp Logs and then Served IP Addresses Main fare Served IP Menu Statistics amp Logs Addresses The following example shows the Served IP Addresses screen after three clients have leased IP addresses The first client did not provide a Host Name in its DHCP messages the second and third clients did Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP DHCP 00 59 EN 00 00 C5 70 00 04 DHCP 00 59 Bill s Pentium DHCP 00 45 Steve s Power Mac Lease Management The rightmost column displays the host name supplied by the client if one was provided otherwise it displays the client identifier If a host name is displayed the client identifier is still accessible in a Details pop up menu See below Note The server does not query the client for its host name Macintosh computers running versions of MacOS prior to MacOS version 8 5 OT 2 0 1 TCP IP 2 0 1 do not supply a host name option in their DHCP messages so no host name will appear in the Served IP Addresses list IP Setup 6 25 You can select the entries in the Served IP Addresses screen Use the up and down arrow keys to move the selection to one of the entries in t
235. ore groups of private or interior hosts This is intended to provide superior support for applications that traditionally have difficulty communicating through NAT Dynamic NAT is intended to provide functionality beyond many to one and one to one translation Netopia s NAT implementation makes it possible to have a static mapping of one public address to one private address thus allowing applications such as NetMeeting to work by assuring that any traffic sent back to the source IP address is forwarded through to the internal machine Static one to one mapping works well if you have enough IP addresses for all the workstations on your LAN If you do not Dynamic NAT allows machines to make full use of the publicly routable IP addresses provided by the ISP as necessary on demand When these public IP addresses are no longer being used by a particular workstation they are returned to a pool of available addresses for other workstations to use A common example is a DSL customer s application Most DSL ISPs only provide customers with a few IP addresses for use on their network For networks with more than four or five machines it is usually mandatory to use NAT A customer may have 15 workstations on the LAN all of which need Internet access The customer is only provided five IP addresses by their ISP The customer has eight hosts which only need to use email and have Web access but another seven hosts which use NetMeeting to communicate with cl
236. ormation in the connection profile so that your user name and password or host name and secret are transmitted when you attempt to connect Connection profiles define the networking protocols necessary for the Router to make a remote connection A connection profile is like an address book entry describing how the Router is to get to a remote site or how to recognize and authenticate a connection To create a new connection profile you navigate to the WAN Configuration screen from the Main Menu and select Add Connection Profile Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration gt Profile The Add Connection Profile screen appears Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 IP Profile Parameters COMMIT CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit On a Netopia Router you can add up to 15 more connection profiles for a total of 16 but you can only use one at a time unless you are using VPNs 1 Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection profile It can be any name you wish For example the name of your ISP 2 Toggle Profile Enabled to Yes or No The default is Yes You can toggle it to No if you want to disable it later 3 Select Encapsulation Type and press Return The pop up
237. ost address and always uses the IPV4 Address and the local and remote tunnel endpoint address In Aggressive Mode the Local and Remote Identity Type pop up menus allow you to choose the type of Identity value to use IPv4 Address IPv4 Subnet IPv4 Range Host Name E Mail Address Key ID ASCII and Key ID HEX The Local and Remote Identity Type and Value menus allow you to specify one of the following based on what Local Identity Type you selected in the previous pop up menu IPv4 Address A single IPv4 address in the familiar dotted quad notation a b c d IPv4 Subnet A single IPv4 network address in dotted quad notation a b c d followed by a mask specified either by a slash and a bit count between O and 32 OR by a second dotted quad IPv4 Range Two IPv4 addresses in dotted quad notation a b c d separated by a space Host Name A fully qualified domain name FQDN E Mail Address An RFC 822 e mail address in the form user hostname Key ID ASCII An opaque string consisting of printable ASCII characters represented as a sequence of printable ASCII characters Key ID HEX An opaque string consisting of arbitrary 8 bit ASCII values represented as a sequence of hexadecimal digits each of which corresponds to one nibble of the string value The Authentication Method pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 authentication method The only currently supported authentication method is Shared Secret Other methods may be supported in fu
238. ost numbers Conversely Class C networks have a small number of possible host numbers but a large number of possible network numbers Thus the InterNIC assigns Class A addresses to large organizations that have very large numbers of IP hosts while smaller organizations with fewer hosts get Class B or Class C addresses You can tell the various classes apart by the value of the first or high order byte Class A networks use values from 1 to 127 Class B networks use values from 128 to 191 and Class C networks use values from 192 to 223 The following table summarizes some of the differences between Class A B and C networks A 1 127 127 16 777 214 net host host host 97 3 14 250 B 128 191 16 384 65 534 net net host host 140 100 10 11 C 192 223 2 097 152 254 net net net host 197 204 13 7 Subnets and subnet masks Often an entire organization is assigned only one IP network number If the organization has several IP networks connected together with IP gateways the network manager can use subnetting to distinguish between these networks even though they all use the same network number Each physical network becomes a subnet with a unique subnet number Subnet numbers appear within IP addresses along with network numbers and host numbers Since an IP address is always 32 bits long using subnet numbers means either the network number or the host numbers must use fewer bits in order to leave room for the subnet
239. ould apply only to switched WAN interface gateways and not to leased line gateways However a new feature can give you Asynchronous PPP dial in support on the Auxiliary port on any gateway including leased line Netopia gateways In any situation where a device is dialing into a Netopia gateway the gateway may need to be configured to serve IP via the WAN interface This is only a requirement if the calling device has not been configured locally to know what its address es are So when a client dialing into a Netopia gateway s WAN interface is expecting addresses to be served by the answering gateway you must set the answering Netopia gateway to serve IP via its WAN interface You can do this in either of two ways e use the Serve Dynamic WAN Clients option in the Address Serving Setup screen Enabling Serve Dynamic WAN Clients only allows you to specify a pool of addresses from which the dial in client may get an IP address It does not allow static addressing If you want to serve addresses dynamically use Serve Dynamic WAN Clients Understanding IP Addressing B 9 e define the address that you want to serve in the Connection Profile s IP Setup screen This method requires a static value to be used Thus any user dialing in can obtain the same IP address for every connection to the profile If you want to serve addresses statically define the address in the Connection Profile Notes The addresses that are to be served cannot be u
240. oute screen The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add Static Route screen see Adding a static route on page 6 8 Deleting a static route To delete a static route in the Static Routes screen select Delete Static Route to display a table of static routes Select a static route from the table and press Return to delete it To exit the table without deleting the selected static route press Escape Rules of static route installation The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 applies certain rules before installing enabled static routes in the IP routing table An enabled static route will not be installed in the IP routing table if any of the following conditions are true e The static route s Next Gateway IP Address matches an IP address in the range of IP addresses being distributed by DHCP The static route s Next Gateway IP Address is determined to be unreachable by the Router e The static route s route information conflicts with a connection profile s route information e The connection profile associated with the static route has a disabled dial on demand setting and there is no current connection using that connection profile A static route that is already installed in the IP routing table will be removed if any of the conditions listed above become true for that static route However an enabled static route is automatically reinstalled once the conditions listed above are no longer true for that s
241. output filters is exactly the same The main difference between the two involves their reference to source and destination From the perspective of an input filter your local network is the destination of the packets it checks and the remote network is their source From the perspective of an output filter your local network is the source of the packets and the remote network is their destination Input filter The remote network The local network Output filter The local network The remote network To add a filter select Display Change Filter Set in the Filter Set screen From the pop up menu select the filter set to which you will add a filter The Display Change Filter Set screen appears Security 9 27 Display Change Filter Set Filter Set Name Filter Set 3 Add Input Filter to Filter Set Display Change Input Filter Delete Input Filter Move Input Filter Add Output Filter to Filter Set Display Change Output Filter Delete Output Filter Move Output Filter Note There are two groups of items in this screen one for input filters and one for output filters In this section you ll learn how to add an input filter to a filter set Adding an output filter works exactly the same way providing you keep the different source and destination perspectives in mind 1 To add a filter select Add Input Filter to Filter Set and press Return The Add Input Filter screen appears Add Input Filter En
242. owed TCP sequence number difference 1 65535 0 to disable Max TCP Sequence Number Difference Enter a value in this field This value represents the maximum sequence number difference allowed between subsequent TCP packets If this number is exceeded the packet is dropped The acceptable range is O 65535 A value of O zero disables this check e Enable default mapping to router This is disabled by default Toggling this option to Yes will allow the router to respond to traffic received on this interface for example ICMP Echo requests 2 26 Firmware User Guide Note If Stateful Inspection is enabled on a base connection profile for example for PPP RFC1483 bridged routed or PPPoE Enable default mapping to router must be yes to allow inbound VPN terminations for example for PPTP ATMP client access to the router Deny Fragmented Packets Toggling this option to Yes causes the router to discard fragmented packets on this interface e You can apply these parameters to your Exposed Address lists by selecting your Exposed Address List from the pop up menu Stateful Inspection Parameters Exposed Address List N Max TCP Sequ my _xposed_list lt lt None gt gt Enable defaul Deny Fragment Exposed Addre Up Down Arrows to select then Return Enter ESC to cancel WAN and System Configuration 2 27 Exposed Addresses You can specify the IP addresses you want to expose by selecting Add Exposed Address
243. page 8 4 IP Routing Table on page 8 7 General Statistics on page 8 7 System Information on page 8 9 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP on page 8 10 Quick View Status Overview You can get a useful overall status report from the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 in the Quick View screen To go to the Quick View screen select Quick View in the Main Menu Main Menu Quick View The Quick View screen has three status sections General status Current DSL Status LED Status 8 2 Firmware User Guide General status Quick View 10 11 2002 07 31 26 AM Default IP Gateway 0 0 CPU Load 4 Unused Memory 6044 KB Primary DNS Server 0 0 Gateway installed Backup Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 Domain Name netopia com IP Address Ethernet LAN 00 00 c5 ff 70 00 192 168 1 1 100Mbps Full Duplex ATM ADSL WAN 00 00 c5 ff 70 02 0 0 0 USB LAN 00 00 c5 9a 09 a9 192 168 1 1 Down Current WAN Connection Status Profile Name Rate Use Remote Address ISP 1536 10 IP 92 163 4 1 Lcl NAT 192 163 100 6 VPN QuickView LED Status G G Current Date The current date this can be set with the Date and Time utility see Date and time on page 2 29 Default IP Gateway The gateway s default gateway which may be either manually configured or learned via DHCP This is the value you assigned in the Default IP Gateway field If you are using the gateway s d
244. permanently allocated from the IP Address Serving pool until you release them To release these addresses navigate back to the Main Menu then Statistics amp Logs Served IP Addresses and Lease Management Statistics amp Logs Served IP Addresses Main Menu m Lease Management IP Address Lease Management Reset All Leases Release BootP Leases Reclaim Declined Addresses Hit RETURN ENTER you will return to the previous screen Select Release BootP Leases and press Return Back in IP Address Serving the Serve Dynamic WAN Clients toggle More Address Serving Options The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 includes a number of enhancements in the built in DHCP IP address server These enhancements include The ability to exclude one or more IP addresses from the address serving pool so the addresses will not be served to clients The ability to reserve a particular IP address for a client with a particular Ethernet MAC address 6 24 Firmware User Guide e The ability to view the host name associated with a client to which the gateway has leased an IP address e The ability for the gateway s Ethernet IP address es to overlap the DHCP address serving pool s e The ability to serve as a DHCP Relay Agent The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports reserving an IP address only for a type 1 client identifier i e an Ethernet hardware address It does not support reserving an IP address f
245. pical applications are non real time traffic such as IP data traffic This class yields a fair amount of Cell Delay Variation CDV b VBR real time VBR rt Typical applications are real time traffic such as compressed voice over IP and video conferencing This class transmits cells with a more tightly bounded Cell Delay Variation The applications follow CBR Then select a Connection Profile for the Circuit To use the Default Profile select Use Default Profile for Circuit and press Return For other options select a profile from the Use Connection Profile pop up menu 2 8 Firmware User Guide Note With multiple VCs you must explicitly statically bind the second and all subsequent VCs to a profile The first VC will automatically statically bind according to pre defined dynamic binding rules when you add the second VC It will revert back to dynamic binding if the number of VCs is reduced to one for example by deleting previously defined VCs When the link comes up the router binds the VC dynamically to the first suitable Connection Profile or to the Default Profile if there is no Connection Profile configured f you factory default the router the VC binds to the Default Profile e f you delete a Connection Profile that is statically bound to a VC the VC binding is set back to the Default Profile If there is only one VC defined the VC dynamically binds to the first suitable profile or to the Default Profile If there are m
246. plays all of your Connection Profiles Select the one you want to apply this scheduled connection to and press Return Your selection becomes effective Now if your primary WAN link fails the backup link will become active and remain active until the primary link recovers Backup Default Gateway If your Netopia equipment does not have an internal modem or if you do not want to use the internal modem for backup the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers backup functionality to an alternate gateway typically connected to a LAN port A typical application would be to have a LAN connection from your 3300 Series gateway to another gateway that has for example an ISDN or analog modem connection to the Internet and designating the second gateway as the backup gateway Should the primary WAN connection fail traffic would be automatically redirected through your alternate gateway device to maintain Internet connectivity Two menus control the backup gateway feature e the Backup Configuration screen in the WAN Configuration menu Here you enable the backup feature and set some parameters e the IP Setup screen in the System Configuration menu Here you set the IP address of the alternate gateway device Backup Configuration screen To enable the backup feature from the Main Menu select WAN Configuration Advanced Connection Options and then Backup Configuration Main WAN Advanced Backup Menu Configuration Connection Options Configuration
247. protect the configuration screens select Easy Setup from the Main Menu and go to the Easy Setup Security Configuration screen By entering a name and password pair in this screen all access via Telnet and SNMP will be password protected To restrict Telnet access select Security in the Advanced Configuration menu The Security Options screen will appear There are two levels of Telnet restriction available e To restrict Telnet access to the SNMP screens select Enable Telnet Access to SNMP Screens and toggle it to No See SNMP traps on page 8 12 e To restrict Telnet access to all of the configuration screens select Enable Telnet Console Access and toggle it to No Security 9 17 About Filters and Filter Sets Security should be a high priority for anyone administering a network connected to the Internet Using packet filters to control network communications can greatly improve your network s security The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 s packet filters are designed to provide security for the Internet connections made to and from your network You can customize the gateway s filter sets for a variety of packet filtering applications Typically you use filters to selectively admit or refuse TCP IP connections from certain remote networks and specific hosts You will also use filters to screen particular types of connections This is commonly called firewalling your network Before creating filter sets you should read the ne
248. provides the ability to forward Windows Networking NetBIOS broadcasts This is useful for for example a Virtual Private Network in which you want to be able to browse the remote network to which you are tunnelling as part of your Windows Network Neighborhood Routed connections such as VPNs can not use NetBEUI to carry the Network Neighborhood information They need to use NetBIOS because NetBEUI cannot be routed This feature will allow browsing the Network Neighborhood without any additional workstation configuration You enable this feature in the IP Profile Parameters screen of your Connection Profile The IP Profile Parameters screen varies slightly depending on whether your model router connects directly to the Internet or if it connects via an Ethernet connection through a cable or DSL modem The enabling feature is the same for both Using the Tab key toggle NetBIOS Proxy Enabled from the default No to Yes and press Return Your remote Network Neighborhood becomes accessible from your Windows desktop Note The remote IP address and subnet mask should strictly match the IP address and subnet mask configured on the LAN interface of the remote router See the following example Example LAN IP 192 168 1 0 24 LAN IP 192 168 2 0 24 Pc A Router A gt Tunnel t Router B PC B 100 4 100 When PC A sends a Windows networking broadcast it sends it with a destination IP 192 168 1 255 When Rou
249. r Until Carrier During Answer Always Speaker Volume You can set how loud the modem tones will be from the pull down menu 1 Softest 2 Medium 3 Loudest Answer Incoming calls You can determine whether or not the modem will respond to incoming calls on this line from the pull down menu Always or Never Country Select your country from the pull down menu When you are finished press Escape 7 10 Firmware User Guide Backup Configuration screen Navigate to the Backup Configuration screen WAN Configuration Main Menu Advanced Connection Backup Options Configuration This screen is used to configure the conditions under which backup will occur if it will recover and how the modem is configured For the internal V 92 modem the Backup Configuration screen appears as follows when all options are enabled default screen shows fewer menu items until some are enabled Backup Configuration Backup Parameters Backup is Requires Failure of minutes Ping Host Name or IP Address Recovery to ADSL Requires Recovery of minutes Clear Backup Call only if idle Data Link Encapsulation is Automatic 1 Automatic 1 No Async PPP Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company e Select Backup is and from the pop up menu select Automatic default Manual or Disabled You enable line backup by selecting either Manual or Automatic For f
250. rate encryption keys for you You enter a passphrase that you choose in the Passphrase field The passphrase can be any string of words or numbers Note While clients may also have a passphrase feature these are vendor specific and may not necessarily create the same keys You can passphrase generate a set of keys on one and manually enter them on the other to get around this Select the Default Key 1 4 The longer the key the stronger the encryption and the more difficult it is to break the encryption e On Manual allows you to enter your own encryption keys manually This is a difficult process but only 2 34 Firmware User Guide needs to be done once Avoid the temptation to enter all the same characters Wireless LAN Configuration Enable Wireless Yes SSID 4405 2605 Channel 6 Closed System Open Enable WEP On Manual I Key 40 bit 9a82ff3d92 Key 128 bit 2 5d42db7b734f 4e17b65881e Key 256 bit db298860b6f380e6daec7dbfd4 Key c8e5281016 Setting one of the key sizes Default Key 1 4 Specifies which key the Router will use to encrypt transmitted traffic The default is key 1 Key 1 4 The encryption keys You enter keys using hexadecimal digits For 40 64bit encryption you need ten digits 26 digits for 128bit and 58 digits for 256bit WEP Hexadecimal characters are O 9 and a f The longer the key the stronger the encryption and the more difficult it is to break
251. re Equal Dest Port ID 1723 Established TCP Conns Only No 4 28 Firmware User Guide Select Output Filter 2 and press Return In the Change Output Filter 2 screen set the Protocol Type to allow GRE as shown below Change Output Filter 2 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Dest IP Address Mask Protocol Type ATMP example To enable a firewall to allow ATMP traffic you must provision the firewall to allow inbound and outbound UDP packets specifically destined for port 5150 The source port may be dynamic so often it is not useful to apply a compare function on this portion of the control negotiation packets You must also set the firewall to allow inbound and outbound GRE packets Protocol 47 Internet Assigned Numbers Document RFC 1700 enabling transport of the tunnel payload From the Main Menu navigate to Display Change IP Filter Set and from the pop up menu select Basic Firewall Main Menu System Configuration Select Display Change Input Filter Display Change Input Filter screen Filter Sets Display Change Filter Set 2000 Yes No 6000 Yes No Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 29 Select Input Filter 1 and press Return In the Change Input Filter 1 screen set the Destination Port information as shown below Change Input Filter 1 Enabled Forward Source IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest
252. reater Greater N A comparison Than Than Dest port ID 2000 6000 N A 1023 1023 N A Basic Firewall s filters play the following roles Input filters 1 and 2 These block WAN originated OpenWindows and X Windows sessions Service origination requests for these protocols use ports 2000 and 6000 respectively Since these are greater than 1023 OpenWindows and X Windows traffic would otherwise be allowed by input filter 4 Input filters 1 and 2 must precede input filter 4 otherwise they would have no effect since filter 4 would have already forwarded OpenWindows and X Windows traffic Input filter 3 This filter explicitly forwards all WAN originated ICMP traffic to permit devices on the WAN to ping devices on the LAN Ping is an Internet service that is useful for diagnostic purposes Input filters 4 and 5 These filters forward all TCP and UDP traffic respectively when the destination port is greater than 1023 This type of traffic generally does not allow a remote host to connect to the LAN using one of the potentially intrusive Internet services such as Telnet FTP and WWW Security 9 31 Output filter 1 This filter forwards all outgoing traffic to make sure that no outgoing connections from the LAN are blocked Basic Firewall is suitable for a LAN containing only client hosts that want to access servers on the WAN but not for a LAN containing servers providing services to clients on the WAN Basic Firewall s general
253. ress server is that it takes less time than manually distributing the addresses This is particularly true if you have many addresses to distribute You need to enter information only once rather than having to enter it on each host separately This also reduces the potential for misconfiguring hosts Another reason to use the Router as an address server is that it will distribute addresses only to hosts that need to use them All Routers come with an integrated Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP server Some gateways also come with a Macintosh Internet Protocol MacIP server These servers provide a means of distributing IP addresses to either a Mac or PC workstation as needed When setting up the DHCP or MacIP servers in the Router it is necessary to understand how workstations lease renew and release their IP addresses This information is helpful in determining dynamic address allocation for a network The term lease describes the action of a workstation requesting and using an IP address The address is dynamic and can be returned to the address pool at a later time The term renew refers to what the workstations do to keep their leased IP address At certain intervals the workstation talks to the DHCP or MaclIP server and renews the lease on that IP address This renewal allows the workstation to keep and use the assigned IP address until the next renewal period The term release refers to a situation where the work
254. rical signals that make up an IP packet travelling over Ethernet By default the Router uses Ethernet packet headers for IP traffic If your network requires 802 3 IP framing you must configure this through SNMP Binary Conversion Table C 1 Appendix C Binary Conversion Table This table is provided to help you choose subnet numbers and host numbers for IP and MaclIP networks that use subnetting for IP addresses Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 0 32 100000 64 1000000 96 1100000 1 33 1000001 65 1000001 97 1100001 2 10 34 100010 66 1000010 98 1100010 3 11 35 100011 67 1000011 99 1100011 4 100 36 100100 68 1000100 100 1100100 5 101 37 100101 69 1000101 101 1100101 6 110 38 100110 70 1000110 102 1100110 7 111 39 100111 71 1000111 103 1100111 8 1000 40 101000 72 1001000 104 1101000 9 1001 41 101001 73 1001001 105 1101001 10 1010 42 101010 74 1001010 106 1101010 11 1011 43 101011 75 1001011 107 1101011 12 1100 44 101100 76 1001100 108 1101100 13 1101 45 101101 77 1001101 109 1101101 14 1110 46 101110 78 1001110 110 1101110 15 1111 47 101111 79 1001111 111 1101111 16 10000 48 110000 80 1010000 112 1110000 17 10001 49 110001 81 1010001 113 1110001 18 10010 50 110010 82 1010010 114 1110010 19 10011 51 110011 83 1010011 115 1110011 20 10100 52 110100 84 1010100 116 1110100 21 10101 53 110101 85 1010101 117 1110101 22 1011
255. rt number must be less than the port number specified in the filter Less Than or Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must be less than or equal to the port number specified in the filter Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must equal the port number specified in the filter Greater Than For the filter to match the packet s port number must be greater than the port number specified in the filter Greater Than or Equal For the filter to match the packet s port number must be greater than or equal to the port number specified in the filter Other filter attributes There are three other attributes to each filter e The filter s order i e priority in the filter set Whether the filter is currently active Whether the filter is set to forward packets or to block discard packets Putting the parts together When you display a filter set its filters are displayed as rows in a table 211 211 17 0 0 0 0 ce The table s columns correspond to each filter s attributes The filter s priority in the set Filter number 1 with the highest priority is first in the table Source IP Addr The packet source IP address to match Dest IP Addr The packet destination IP address to match Security 9 21 Proto The protocol to match This can be entered as a number see the table below or as TCP or UDP if those protocols are used
256. rvice you would like to make available and the internal IP address to which you would like to provide access You may also define a specific public IP address to use for this service if you want to use an IP other than the WAN IP address of the Netopia Router Static mapping If you want to host your own Website or provide other Internet services to the public you need more than classic NAT The reason is noted under Port Address Translation above external users cannot initiate traffic to computers on your LAN because external users can never see the real addresses of the computers on your LAN If you want users outside your LAN to have access for example to a Web or FTP server that you host you need to make a public representation of the real IP addresses of those servers Static mappings are a way to make one or more private IP addresses fully accessible from the public network via corresponding public IP addresses Some applications may negotiate multiple TCP connections in the process of communication which often does not work with traditional PAT Static mapping offers the ability to use these applications through NAT Each private IP address is mapped on a one to one basis to a public IP address that can be accessed from the Internet or public network As with PAT mappings you may have multiple static mappings to map a range of private IP addresses to a range of public IP addresses if desired Multiple Network Address Translation 3 3
257. s Translation NAT Map List Name Add Out Easy PAT List Show Ch my_map Delete Add Map Show Ch Delete Add Ser Show Ch Delete NAT Ass Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit Multiple Network Address Translation 3 13 The Show Change NAT Map List screen appears Show Change NAT Map List Map List Name my map Add Map Show Change Maps Delete Map Add Map allows you to add a new map to the map list Show Change Maps allows you to modify the individual maps within the list Delete Map allows you to delete a map from the list Selecting Show Change Maps or Delete Map displays the same pop up menu Show Change NAT Map List Type Public Address Range 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 254 pat 206 1 1 6 192 168 1 253 192 168 1 254 static 206 1 1 1 206 1 1 2 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 252 dynamic 206 1 1 3 206 1 1 5 Scroll to the map you want to modify using the arrow keys and press Return 3 14 Firmware User Guide The Change NAT Map screen appears Change NAT Map my _map First Private Address 192 168 1 253 Last Private Address 192 168 1 254 Use NAT Public Range my second range Public Range Type is static Public Range Start Address is 206 1 1 1 Public Range End Address is 206 1 1 2 CHANGE NAT MAP Make any modifications you need and then select CHANGE NAT MAP and press Return Your changes will become effective and you will be returned to the
258. s are sent every 30 seconds Each RIP packet is authenticated using one key and sent When the Netopia router receives an authenticated RIP packet from a device it keeps track of that device peer The longer it is in use a single key becomes less secure Therefore RFC2082 specifies that an interface must support at least two keys per interface to allow a transition from an old key to a new key It is recommended that you specify an overlapping time of five minutes for transitioning from one key to the next Whenever two keys are valid at the same time the Netopia router tries to determine if other peers devices that it has received an authenticated packet from in the past three minutes on its network are using the new key If any of the peers have not used the new key yet the Netopia router will send RIP updates twice once with each key If the last valid key expires the Device Event History logs a RIP last authentication key expired message and continues to use that key as if it were still valid Authentication configuration To configure RIP 2 MD5 authentication from the Main Menu select System Configuration then IP Setup Main Menu 7 System Configuration IP Setup The IP Setup screen appears IP Setup 6 11 IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway Backup IP Gateway Primary Domain Name Server
259. s that use the same subnet mask Set to v2 the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will accept routing information provided by RIP packets from other routers that use different subnet masks For more information on v2 MD5 Authentication see RIP 2 MD5 Authentication on page 6 10 7 Return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape Select COMMIT and press Return Your new Connection Profile will be added If you want to view the Connection Profiles in your device return to the WAN Configuration screen and select Display Change Connection Profile The list of Connection Profiles is displayed in a scrolling pop up screen WAN Configuration IP Address Easy Setup Profile 255 225 255 255 Profile 1 0 0 0 0 You can also delete Connection Profiles by selecting them in the same manner using the Delete Connection Profile option in the WAN Configuration screen 2 14 Firmware User Guide Advanced Connection Options Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection The menu supports delaying some configuration changes until after the Netopia Router is restarted If your Netopia Router is preconfigured by your service provider or if you are not remotely configuring the router you can leave this setting unchanged The purpose of this feature is to defer configuration changes only when remotely configuring or reconfiguring the Netopia Router to prevent premature Telnet disconnection When this feature is enabled no changes to t
260. sec Key Management for VPNs 5 19 IKE Phase 1 Configuration Display Change IKE Phase 1 Profile Add IKE Phase 1 Profile Delete IKE Phase 1 Profile The IKE Phase 1 Configuration screen allows configuration of global non connection profile specific IPSec parameters This screen allows you to Display Change Add or Delete an IKE Phase 1 profile IPsec Manual Key Entry The Version 7 0 2 firmware has a redesigned layout and additional options for manual key entry If you selected Manual Key Management in the IPsec Tunnel Options screen you will need to enter your encryption keys in the IPsec Manual Keys screen IPsec Tunnel Options Key Management Manual Encapsulation ESP ESP Encryption Transform ESP Authentication Transform IPsec Manual Keys COMMIT 5 20 Firmware User Guide Select IPsec Manual Keys and press Return IPsec Manual Keys SHA1 ESP Auth Key SHA1 AH Auth Key Depending on your selections of Encapsulation Encryption Transform and Authentication Transform in the IPsec Tunnel Options screen the IPSec Manual Keys screen will display differing entry fields to enter authorization keys and encryption keys With Manual Keys you must manually configure identical authentication and encryption keys at both ends of the tunnel The authentication keys are either 32 for MD5 or 40 for SHA1 ascii hex characters while the encryption keys are 16 for DES or 48 for triple DES asc
261. sed elsewhere For example you wouldn t want to define a static address in a Connection Profile to be served via the WAN that is already defined in the DHCP pool of addresses e In order to work correctly you must define a host or node address in the IP Profile Parameters of the Connection Profile This is accomplished by specifying the IP address that is to be statically served via the WAN and then by entering a mask value of 255 255 255 255 Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses e Before you allocate IP addresses using DHCP and MacIP consider whether you need to set aside any static addresses e Note any planned and currently used static addresses before you use DHCP and MaclP e Avoid fragmenting your block of IP addresses For example try to use a continuous range for the static addresses you choose B 10 Firmware User Guide ee 1 Distributed to the Router E hernet IP address Manually distributed static 2 3 H 15 16 Pool of addresses distributed 10 by MaclP and DHCP 11 12 Block of IP host addresses ra derived from network IP address mask issued by ISP 15 The figure above shows an example of a block of IP addresses being distributed correctly OWONDOTBWNHE The example follows these rules An IP address must not be used as a static address if it is also in a range of addr
262. selection Datalink PPP MP Options Data Compression Standard LZS Send Authentication PAP Send User Name Send Password Receive User Name Receive Password Data Compression defaults to Standard LZS You can select Ascend LZS if you are connecting to compatible equipment or None from the pull down menu The Send Authentication pull down menu lets you select PAP CHAP or None Selecting PAP or CHAP allows you to enter your authentication credentials for both sending and receiving connections PAP requires a User Name and Password CHAP requires a Host Name and Secret The screen changes to accommodate your selection WAN and System Configuration 2 11 Datalink PPP MP Options Standard LZS Data Compression Send Authentication PAP Send User Name Send Password Receive User Name Receive Password Dial on Demand If you are creating a Backup profile supported models only and have selected Backup as the Interface Group in the previous screen you can toggle Dial on Demand to Yes the default or No See Line Backup on page 7 1 for more information Return to the Add Connection Profile screen by pressing Escape 5 Select IP Profile Parameters and press Return The IP Profile Parameters screen appears 2 12 Firmware User Guide IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled Yes IP Addressing Numbered NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List
263. so review and remove IP traps Monitoring Tools 8 13 To go to the IP Trap Receivers screen select IP Trap Receivers The IP Trap Receivers screen appears IP Trap Receivers Display Change IP Trap Receiver Add IP Trap Receiver Delete IP Trap Receiver Return Enter to modify an existing Trap Receiver Navigate from here to view add modify and delete IP Trap Receivers Setting the IP trap receivers 1 Select Add IP Trap Receiver 2 Select Receiver IP Address or Domain Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the SNMP manager you want to receive the trap 3 Select Community String if you enabled one in the SNMP Setup screen and enter the appropriate password 4 Select Add Trap Receiver Now and press Return You can add up to seven more receivers Viewing IP trap receivers To display a view only table of IP trap receivers select Display Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen Modifying IP trap receivers 1 To edit an IP trap receiver select Display Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen 2 Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return 3 Inthe Change IP Trap Receiver screen edit the information as needed and press Return Deleting IP trap receivers 1 To delete an IP trap receiver select Delete IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen 2 Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return 3 Inthe dialog box select Continue and pre
264. ss Escape You are returned to the Add Connection Profile screen Select COMMIT and press Return Your backup Connection Profile will be created and enabled Line Backup 7 7 IP Setup Here you set the IP address of the alternate gateway Navigate to the IP Setup screen under the System Configuration menu Main Menu I System Configuration IP Setup IP Setup Ethernet IP Address 192 168 1 1 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Define Additional Subnets Default IP Gateway Backup IP Gateway Primary Domain Name Server Secondary Domain Name Server Domain Name Rip Options Multicast Forwarding Static Routes IP Address Serving Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen Set Backup IP Gateway to 127 0 0 2 Set Secondary Domain Name Server to the IP Address DNS of your dial up ISP For information about the Backup Default Gateway option see Backup Default Gateway on page 7 14 7 8 Firmware User Guide WAN Configuration To configure the modem characteristics from the Main Menu select WAN Configuration and then WAN Setup Main WAN Menu OT WAN Configuration Setup WAN Configuration WAN Wide Area Network Setup ATM Circuits Configuration Display Change Connection Profile Add Connection Profile Delete Connection Profile WAN D
265. ss Return 8 14 Firmware User Guide Security 9 1 Chapter 9 Security The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 provides a number of security features to help protect its configuration screens and your local network from unauthorized access Although these features are optional it is strongly recommended that you use them This section covers the following topics Suggested Security Measures on page 9 1 Telnet Tiered Access Two Password Levels on page 9 2 Telnet Access on page 9 16 About Filters and Filter Sets on page 9 17 Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets on page 9 24 Policy based Routing using Filtersets on page 9 32 Firewall Tutorial on page 9 35 Configuration Management on page 9 42 Suggested Security Measures In addition to setting up user accounts Telnet access and filters all of which are covered later in this chapter there are other actions you can take to make the Router and your network more secure Change the SNMP community strings or passwords The default community strings are universal and could easily be known to a potential intruder Set the answer profile so it must match incoming calls to a connection profile 9 2 Firmware User Guide Telnet Tiered Access Two Password Levels Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers tiered access control for greater security and protection against accidental or malicious misc
266. ss and enter an IP address at the end of the range e Ifyou choose static as the range type a new menu item First Public Address becomes visible 3 10 Firmware User Guide Select First Public Address and enter the first exterior IP address in the range you want to assign Select Last Public Address and enter an IP address at the end of the range Select ADD NAT PUBLIC RANGE and press Return The range will be added to your list and you will be returned to the Network Address Translation screen Once the public ranges have been assigned the next step is to bind interior addresses to them Because these bindings occur in ordered lists called map lists you must first define the list then add mappings to it From the Network Address Translation screen select Add Map List and press Return The Add NAT Map List screen appears Add NAT Map List Map List Name my _map Add Map Select Map List Name and enter a descriptive name for this map list Anew menu item Add Map appears Select Add Map and press Return The Add NAT Map screen appears Multiple Network Address Translation 3 11 Add NAT Map my map First Private Address 192 168 1 1 Last Private Address 192 168 1 254 Use NAT Public Range Select First and Last Private Address and enter the first and last interior IP addresses you want to assign to this mapping Select Use NAT Public Range and press Return A screen appears displaying the publi
267. ss map to the list of address maps which are configured creating a map list The mappings in the map list are order dependent and are compared in order from the top of the list to the bottom If a particular resource is not available subordinate mappings can be defined that will redirect traffic Supported traffic MultiNat supports the following IP protocols e PAT TCP UDP traffic which does not carry source or destination IP addresses or ports in the data stream i e HTTP Telnet r commands tftp NFS NTP SMTP NNTP etc e Static NAT All IP protocol traffic which does not carry or otherwise rely on the source or destination IP addresses in the data stream e Dynamic NAT All IP protocol traffic which does not carry or otherwise rely on the source or destination IP addresses in the data stream Support for AOL Instant Messenger AIM File Transfer Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 provides Application Level Gateway ALG support for AOL Instant Messenger AIM file transfer This allows AIM users to exchange files even when both users are behind NAT Previously the file transfer function would work only if one or neither of the two users were behind NAT Currently there is a restriction that the remote user must be routed to via the WAN interface otherwise the connections will fail There is no restriction as to the number of connections There is no user configuration required for this feature 3 6 Firmware User Gu
268. sswords that must be used by an SNMP manager querying or configuring the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 An SNMP manager using the Read Only Community String can examine statistics and configuration information from the gateway but cannot modify the gateway s configuration An SNMP manager using the Read Write Community String can both examine and modify configuration parameters By default the read only and read write community strings are set to public and private respectively You should change both of the default community strings to values known only to you and trusted system adminis trators To change a community string select it and enter a new value Setting the Read Only and Read Write community strings to the empty string will block all SNMP requests to the gateway The gateway may still send SNMP Traps if those are properly enabled Previously if either community string was the empty string SNMP Requests specifying an empty community string were accepted and processed This change is designed to allow the administrator to block SNMP access to the gateway and to provide more granular control over the allowed SNMP operations to the gateway Setting only the Read Write community string to the empty string will block SNMP Set Requests to the gateway but Get Requests and Get Next Requests will still be honored using the Read Only community string assuming that is not the empty string Setting only the Read Only community s
269. startup are not selectable 6 28 Firmware User Guide Served IP Addresses Type Expires Host Name Client Identifier SCROLL UP Excluded for the gateway s IP address Excluded DHCP 00 24 Barr s XPi 120 Lease Management Hit RETURN ENTER for available operations DHCP Relay Agent The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers DHCP Relay Agent functionality as defined in RFC1542 A DHCP relay agent is a computer system or a gateway that is configured to forward DHCP requests from clients on the LAN to a remote DHCP server and to pass the replies back to the requesting client systems When a DHCP client starts up it has no IP address nor does it know the IP address of a DHCP server Therefore it uses an IP broadcast to communicate with one or more DHCP servers These broadcasts are normally limited to the network segment on which the client is located and do not pass through gateways such as the Netopia Router If the Netopia Router is configured to act as a DHCP server it will assign the client an address from an address pool configured locally in the Netopia Router and respond to the client s request itself However if the Netopia Router is configured to act as a DHCP relay agent it does not satisfy the DHCP request itself but instead forwards the request to one or more remote DHCP servers These servers process the request assign an address from an address pool configured on the remote server and forward the response back t
270. station is no longer using its assigned IP address or has been shut down IP addresses can be manually released as well The IP address goes back into the DHCP or MaclIP address pool to be reassigned to another workstation as needed Technical note on subnet masking Note The IP address supplied by the Router will be a unique number You may want to replace this number with a number that your ISP supplies if you are configuring the gateway for a static IP address However the Router and all devices on the same local network must have the same subnet mask If you require a different class address you can edit the IP Mask field to enter the correct address Refer to the table below Number of Devices other than Largest Possible Ethernet Subnet Router on Local Network Mask 1 255 255 255 252 2 5 255 255 255 248 6 6 13 255 255 255 240 14 14 29 255 255 255 224 30 30 61 255 255 255 192 62 125 255 255 255 128 125 259 255 255 255 0 Understanding IP Addressing B 7 Configuration This section describes the specific IP address lease renew and release mechanisms for both the Mac and PC with either DHCP or MaclIP address serving DHCP address serving Windows 95 workstation The Win95 workstation requests and renews its lease every half hour The Win95 workstation does NOT relinquish its DHCP address lease when the machine is shut down e The lease can be manually expired using the
271. strategy is to explicitly forward WAN originated TCP and UDP traffic to ports greater than 1023 Ports lower than 1024 are the service origination ports for various Internet services such as FTP Telnet and the World Wide Web WWW A more complicated filter set would be required to provide WAN access to a LAN based server See the next section Possible modifications for ways to allow remote hosts to use services provided by servers on the LAN Possible modifications You can modify the sample filter set Basic Firewall to allow incoming traffic using the examples below These modifications are not intended to be combined Each modification is to be the only one used with Basic Firewall The results of combining filter set modifications can be difficult to predict It is recommended that you take special care if you are making more than one modification to the sample filter set Trusted host To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote host with the IP address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163 176 8 243 insert the following input filter anead of the current input filter 1 Enabled Yes e Forward Yes e Source IP Address a b c d e Source IP Address Mask 255 255 255 255 e Dest IP Address 0 0 0 0 e Dest IP Address Mask 0 0 0 0 e Protocol Type O Trusted subnet To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote subnet with subnet address a b c d corresponding to a numbered IP address such as 163
272. t Telnet from the Utilities amp Diagnostics menu The Telnet client screen appears Telnet Host Name or IP Address Control Character to Suspend Q START A TELNET SESSION Resume Suspended Session Terminate Suspended Session Enter the host name or the IP address in dotted decimal format of the machine you want to Telnet into and press Return e Either accept the default control character Q used to suspend the Telnet session or type a different one START A TELNET SESSION becomes highlighted e Press Return and the Telnet session will be initiated To suspend the session press Control Q or whatever other control character you specified To go back to your Telnet session select Resume Suspended Session Select a session from the pop up menu and press Return To end a suspended session select Terminate Suspended Session Select a session from the pop up menu and press Return 10 6 Firmware User Guide Factory Defaults You can reset the Router to its factory default settings In the Utilities amp Diagnostics screen select Revert to Factory Defaults and press Return Select CONTINUE in the dialog box and press Return The Router will reboot and its settings will return to the factory defaults deleting your configurations In an emergency you can also use the Reset switch to return the gateway to its factory default settings Call Netopia Technical Support for instructions on using the Rese
273. t backup event was on layer 1 it will display the Requires Failure of value When the current interface is the Backup interface and a recovery condition exists it will display the Requires Recovery of value The displayed value does not change Rather it indicates how high the Time Since Detection must count before the switchover occurs The FORCE BACKUP FORCE RECOVERY option is a selectable option that depending on the current state of backup will force the switching of gateways If you are currently in backup mode the option will be FORCE RECOVERY If you are currently in primary mode the option will be FORCE BACKUP Selecting either one and pressing Return will force the link to switch to the other mode QuickView The QuickView screen now has an information element to indicate which gateway is in use Quick View 1 29 2002 01 05 35 PM Default IP Gateway 4 5582 KB 0 0 0 0 p Q 2 a du Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Gateway installed Backup 0 0 0 0 oO ae Rae i Secondary DNS Server Monitoring Tools 8 1 Chapter 8 Monitoring Tools This chapter discusses the Router s device and network monitoring tools These tools can provide statistical information report on current network status record events and help in diagnosing and locating problems This section covers the following topics Quick View Status Overview on page 8 1 Statistics amp Logs on page 8 4 Event Histories on
274. t menus from the Change Connection Profile menu under the WAN Configuration screen for a Connection Profile you have already created Main f Display Change Menu WAN Configuration Connection Profile or you can create a new Connection Profile with your IKE settings included as you go The IKE Key management settings are part of the Data Link Options that you specify in the Add Connection Profile or Change Connection Profile menus In this description it is assumed that you are changing an existing Connection Profile Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 9 A Change Connection Profile screen is shown below Change Connection Profile Profile Name Easy Setup Profile Profile Enabled Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Telco Options Note The Change Connection Profile screen will offer different options depending on the model of gateway you are using You can associate an IPsec profile with the Primary the Backup or choose to apply it to Any Port of the WAN interface by choosing the interface from the Interface Group pop up menu as shown below Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type IPsec Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Interface Group Primary Backup From the Encapsulation Type pop up menu select IPsec Then select Encapsulation Options a
275. t switch Note Reset to factory defaults with caution You will need to reconfigure all of your settings in the gateway If you lose your password and are unable to access the Telnet screens you can manually reset the gateway in an emergency See Appendix A Troubleshooting Transferring Configuration and Firmware Files with TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP is a method of transferring data over an IP network TFTP is a client server application with the gateway as the client To use the Router as a TFTP client a TFTP server must be available Netopia Inc has a public access TFTP server on the Internet where you can obtain the latest firmware versions To use TFTP select Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP in the Statistics amp Diagnostics screen and press Return The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP screen appears Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP TFTP Server Name Firmware File Name Users njbill Desktop n808 bin GET ROUTER FIRMWARE FROM SERVER Config File Name Get Configuration Destination Current Configuration GET CONFIG FROM SERVER Send Configuration Current Configuration SEND CONFIG TO SERVER TFTP Transfer State Idle TFTP Current Transfer Bytes 0 The sections below describe how to update the Router s firmware and how to download and upload configuration files Utilities and Diagnostics 10 7 Updating firmware Firmware updates may be available periodi
276. t you selected will now be bound to the default profile Note There is no interdependency between NAT and IP Addressing Also the Local WAN IP Address and Mask fields visibility are dependent only on the IP Addressing type Multiple Network Address Translation 3 25 NAT Associations Configuration of map and server lists alone is not sufficient to enable NAT for a WAN connection because map and server lists must be linked to a profile that controls the WAN interface This can be a Connection Profile a WAN Ethernet interface a default profile or a default answer profile Once you have configured your map and server lists you may want to reassign them to different interface controlling profiles for example Connection Profiles To permit easy access to this IP Setup functionality you can use the NAT Associations screen You access the NAT Associations screen from the Network Address Translation screen Main System IP Network Address Menu Configuration Setup Translation Select NAT Associations and press Return The NAT Associations screen appears NAT Associations Profile Interface Name Nat Map List Name Server List Name Default Answer Profile On my first _map my servers Easy Setup Profile On Easy PAT my_servers Profile 01 On my _second_map my servers Profile 02 On my first_map my server list Profile 03 On lt lt None gt gt lt lt None gt gt e You can toggle NAT On or Off for
277. tain at least 20 cm between the wireless router and any body part of the user to be in compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines Technical Specifications and Safety Information D 7 Electrical Safety Advisory Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem Therefore it is advised that this equipment be connected to AC power through the use of a surge arrestor or similar protection device D 8 Firmware User Guide Index A add static route 6 8 ADSL Line Configuration 2 4 advanced configuration features 2 22 ATMP 4 17 tunnel options 4 15 B backup default gateway 7 14 backup line 7 1 basic firewall 9 30 BootP 6 17 clients 6 23 broadcasts B 14 Cc change static route 6 9 community strings 8 12 configuration troubleshooting PC A 1 configuration files downloading with TFTP 10 7 uploading with TFTP 10 8 Configuration Management 9 42 configuring with console based management 1 2 2 1 configuring terminal emulation software 1 4 Connection profiles 2 9 console based management Index 1 configuring with 1 2 2 1 Constant Bit Rate CBR 2 6 D D port 9 21 Data Encryption Standard DES 4 17 date and time setting 2 29 dead peer detection 5 12 delayed configuration 2 14 delete static route 6 9 DES 4 3 4 7 5 1 designing a new filter set 9 23 DHCP
278. tatic route 6 10 Firmware User Guide RIP 2 MD5 Authentication Firmware version 5 3 7 supports RIP 2 MD5 Authentication RFC2082 Routing Internet Protocol Version 2 Message Digest 5 The purpose of MD5 authentication is to provide an additional level of confidence that a RIP packet received was generated by a reliable source In other words MD5 authentication provides an enhanced level of security that information that your PC receives does not originate from a malicious source posing as part of your network Overview All participants in an authenticated RIP environment on a network must share an identifier key There is no key exchange protocol like IKE so all keys must be manually entered by an administrator RIP 2 MD5 Authentication requires that an interface configured to receive authenticated packets ignore unau thenticated packets or packets authenticated with an invalid key An interface that is not configured for receiving authenticated packets ignores authenticated ones On a Netopia router every interface will be allowed to have up to two keys RIP 2 MD5 authentication can be configured on the Ethernet LAN all models Ethernet WAN models Connection Profiles and the Default Profile Keys can have lifetimes defined as a start date and time and an end date and time or infinite Key management Typically you configure only one key on a given interface and all of the interfaces that interact with that interface RIP update
279. tch option in the answer profile PAP or CHAP in connection profiles callback and general awareness of how your network may be vulnerable An approach to using filters The ultimate goal of network security is to prevent unauthorized access to the network without compromising authorized access Using filter sets is part of reaching that goal Each filter set you design will be based on one of the following approaches e That which is not expressly prohibited is permitted 9 24 Firmware User Guide e That which is not expressly permitted is prohibited It is strongly recommended that you take the latter and safer approach to all of your filter set designs Working with IP Filters and Filter Sets This section covers IP filters and filter sets System Configuration Main Menu gt Filter Sets To work with filters and filter sets begin by accessing the filter set screens Note Make sure you understand how filters work before attempting to use them Read the section About Filters and Filter Sets beginning on page 9 17 Filter Sets Add Filter Set Display Change Filter Set Delete Filter Set The procedure for creating and maintaining filter sets is as follows 1 Add anew filter set 2 Create the filters for the new filter set 3 View change or delete individual filters and filter sets The sections below explain how to execute these steps Securi
280. te Channel 1 Remote name guest tsnext netopia com PPP MP negotiated session 1 Remote EDO 06 03 0 000C5700624 0 tsnext netopia com PPP CCP negotiated session 1 type Ascend LZS Local mode 1 Remote mode 1 tsnext netopia com PPP BACP negotiated session 1 Local MN FFFFFF FF Remote MN 00000001 tsnext netopia com PPP IPCP negotiated session 1 rem 192 168 10 100 local 192 168 1 1 tsnext netopia com gt gt WAN 56K Modem 1 deactivated tsnext netopia com Received Clear Ind from DN 5108645534 Cause 0 tsnext netopia com Issued Clear Response to DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Link 1 down Remote clearing tsnext netopia com PPP IPCP down session 1 tsnext netopia com gt gt Received Speech Setup Ind from DN not supplied 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Multiple Network Address Translation 3 1 Chapter 3 Multiple Network Address Translation Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 offers advanced Multiple Network Address Translation functionality You should read this chapter completely before attempting to configure any of the advanced NAT features This chapter covers the following topics e Overview on page 3 1 e MultiNAT Configuration on page 3 6 e Easy Setup Profile configuration on page 3 6 e Server Lists and Dynamic NAT configuration on page 3 7 e Adding Server Lists on page 3 15 Binding Map Lists and Server Lists on page 3 21 e NAT Associations on page 3 25 e
281. tem If you toggle Closed System to Closed the wireless network is hidden from the scanning features of wireless client computers Unless both the wireless clients and the Router share the same SSID in Closed System mode the Router s wireless LAN will not appear as an available network when scanned for by wireless enabled computers Members of the Closed System WLAN must log onto the Router s wireless network with the identical SSID as that configured in the router Closed System mode is an ideal way to increase wireless security and to prevent casual detection by unwanted neighbors office users or malicious users such as hackers If you toggle it to Open it is more convenient but potentially less secure for clients to access your WLAN by scanning available access points You must decide based on your own network requirements Note Enabling Closed System Mode on your wireless Gateway provides another level of security since your wireless LAN will no longer appear as an available access point to client PCs that are casually scanning for one Your own wireless network clients however must log into the wireless LAN by using the exact SSID of the Netopia Gateway In addition if you have enabled WEP encryption on the Netopia Gateway your network clients must also have WEP encryption enabled and must have the same WEP encryption key as the Netopia Gateway Once the Netopia Gateway is located by a client computer by setting the client to
282. ter A receives this broadcast it translates the destination of this broadcast to match the remote IP of the NetBIOS Proxy enabled VPN profiles and it forwards the broadcast through the VPN tunnel When Router B receives this broadcast it sends it on its LAN 4 32 Firmware User Guide Configuration for Router A IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled No Remote IP Address 192 168 2 1 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Filter Set NetBIOS Proxy Enabled Yes RIP Profile Options Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Configuration for Router B IP Profile Parameters Address Translation Enabled No Remote IP Address 192 168 1 1 Remote IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Filter Set NetBIOS Proxy Enabled Yes RIP Profile Options Enter an IP address in decimal and dot form XXX XXX XXX XXX Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 33 Note Microsoft Network browsing is available with or without a Windows Internet Name Service WINS server Shared volumes on the remote network are accessible with or without a WINS server Local LAN shared volumes that have Port Address Translation PAT applied to them are not available to hosts on the remote LAN For tunnelled traffic NAT on the WAN has no effect on the Microsoft Networking traffic Make sure the NetBIOS filter
283. ters f Configuration Profile gt The IP Parameters Default Profile screen appears IP Parameters Default Profile Address Translation Enabled Yes NAT Map List Easy PAT List NAT Server List Easy Servers Filter Set Firewall Remove Filter Set Receive RIP Return Enter to select lt among between gt e Toggle Address Translation Enabled to Yes e Select NAT Map List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined map lists 3 24 Firmware User Guide IP Parameters Default Profile NAT Map List Name Easy PAT List my map Address Trans lt lt None gt gt NAT Map List NAT Server Li Filter Set F Remove Filter Receive RIP Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit e Select the map list you want to bind to the default profile and press Return The map list you selected will now be bound to the default profile Select NAT Server List and press Return A pop up menu displays a list of your defined server lists IP Parameters Default Profile NAT Server List Name Easy Servers my servers Address Trans lt lt None gt gt s NAT Map List _first_map NAT Server Li Filter Set F Remove Filter Receive RIP Up Down Arrow Keys to select ESC to dismiss Return Enter to Edit e Select the server list you want to bind to the default profile and press Return The server lis
284. the destination address Enter 0 0 0 0 to force the filter to match on all destination IP addresses Select Protocol Type and enter ICMP TCP UDP Any or the number of another IP transport protocol see the table on page 9 21 Note If Protocol Type is set to TCP or UDP the settings for port comparison that you configure in steps 8 and 9 will appear These settings only take effect if the Protocol Type is TCP or UDP Select Source Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet s source port number Then select Source Port ID and enter the actual source port number to match on see the table on page 9 19 Select Dest Port Compare and choose a comparison method for the filter to use on a packet s destination port number Then select Dest Port ID and enter the actual destination port number to match on see the table on page 9 19 When you are finished configuring the filter select ADD THIS FILTER NOW to save the filter in the filter set Select CANCEL to discard the filter and return to the Add IP Filter Set screen Viewing filters To display a table of input or output filters select Display Change Input Filter or Display Change Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen Modifying filters To modify a filter select Display Change Input Filter or Display Change Output Filter in the Display Change Filter Set screen Select a filter from the table and press Return The Change Filter scree
285. the format MM DD YY or MM DD YYYY month day year Note You must enter the date in the format specified The slashes are mandatory For example the entry 5 7 98 would be accepted as May 7 1998 The entry 5 7 would be rejected Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to initiate the scheduled connection Note You must enter the time in the format H M where H is a one or two digit number representing the hour and M is a one or two digit number representing the minutes The colon is mandatory For example the entry 1 3 or 1 03 would be accepted as 3 minutes after one o clock The entry 7 0 or 7 00 would be accepted as seven o clock exactly The entries 44 5 and 2 would be rejected Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM e Select Scheduled Window Duration and enter the maximum duration allowed for this scheduled connection Use the same format restrictions noted above 2 20 Firmware User Guide You are finished configuring the once only options Return to the Add Scheduled Connection screen to continue e In the Add Scheduled Connection screen select Use Connection Profile and choose from the list of connection profiles you have already created A scheduled connection must be associated with a connection profile to be useful The connection profile becomes active during the times specified in the associated scheduled connection if any exists Select ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION to save the current sc
286. thernet Module in this screen Address Translation Enabled allows you to specify whether or not the router performs Network Address Translation NAT on the Ethernet WAN port NAT is enabled by default Local WAN IP Address allows you to manually configure an IP address for use on the Ethernet WAN port The value 0 0 0 0 indicates that the device will act as a DHCP client on the Ethernet WAN port and attempt to acquire an address from a DHCP server By default the router acts as a DHCP client on the Ethernet WAN port The Local WAN IP Mask field becomes visible if you specify a Local WAN IP Address This allows you to manually configure an IP subnet mask for use on the Ethernet WAN port This item is visible only if you have configured a non zero Ethernet IP Address otherwise the router obtains a subnet mask via DHCP The NAT Map List and NAT Server List options are set to the defaults Easy PAT List and Easy Servers These provide standard NAT mappings For more advanced NAT configurations see Multiple Network Address Translation on page 3 1 NAT Options allows you to specify IP Passthrough allowing a single PC on the LAN to have the router s public address assigned to it See IP Passthrough on page 3 27 e Ifyou set Stateful Inspection Enabled to Yes you can enable a security feature for computers on your LAN when NAT is disabled See Stateful Inspection on page 2 23 e The Filter Set pop up allows you t
287. thin that time the peer is considered dead the current phase 2 SAs are torn down and the IKE SA starts a new phase 1 negotiation followed by the normal phase 2 negotiation thereafter When you toggle Dead Peer Detection to Yes on new options appear Advanced IPsec Options SA Lifetime seconds 28800 SA Lifetime Kbytes 0 Perfect Forward Secrecy Ping host Ping retry interval Ping reply timeout Ping host allows you to specify the host IP address of the host to ping and from which replies will be expected This field is only available if you have previously configured and committed remote network IP data in the Add Network Configuration screen under Advanced IP Profile Options See Add Network Configuration on page 5 14 Ping retry interval and Ping reply timeout options appear Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 13 The defaults are 5 seconds and 90 seconds respectively You may adjust these to suit your network s tolerances Note e ICMP Dead Peer Detection is not available when using manual re keying e ICMP Dead Peer Detection does not initiate a series of phase 2 exchanges upon detecting a dead peer it instead initiates a new phase 1 negotiation followed by a new phase 2 negotiation once contact with the peer has been re established e If you are using Multiple Network IPsec the IP address of the ICMP Dead Peer Detection mechanism must be constrained to the set of networ
288. ting the Facility pop up Erase the log by selecting DUMP WAN LOG 2 40 Firmware User Guide You will need to install a Syslog client daemon program on your PC and configure it to report the WAN events you specified in the Logging Configuration screen The following screen shows a sample syslog dump of WAN events tsnext netopia com Link 1 down PPP PAP failure tsnext netopia com gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Requested Disc from DN 917143652500 tsnext netopia com Received Clear Confirm for our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Link 1 down Manual disconnect tsnext netopia com gt gt Issued Speech Setup Request from our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Requested Disc from DN 917143652500 tsnext netopia com Received Clear Confirm for our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com Link 1 down No answer tsnext netopia com Device restarted tsnext netopia com gt gt Received Speech Setup Ind from DN not supplied tsnext netopia com Requested Connect to our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com ASYNC Modem carrier detected more Modem reports 26400 V34 tsnext netopia com gt gt WAN 56K Modem 1 activated at 115 Kbps tsnext netopia com Connect Confirmed to our DN 5108645534 tsnext netopia com PPP Channel 1 up Answer Profile name Default Profile tsnext netopia com PPP NCP up session 1 Channel 1 Final fallback negotiated auth Local PAP Remote NONE tsnext netopia com PPP PAP we accepted remo
289. tion Profiles Connection Profiles WAN IKE Phase 1 Configuration Advanced Connection Options All All Establish WAN Connection Disconnect WAN Connection If a limited user selects Advanced Connection Options in the WAN Configuration menu the Advanced Connection Options screen displays its configuration options according to the following diagram WAN Connection Profiles WAN Connection Profiles Advanced Connection Options Configuration Changes Reset WAN Connection Scheduled Connections Backup Configuration Prioritize Delay Sensitive Data No 9 12 Firmware User Guide Connection Profiles The Superuser can disallow limited user access to a particular Connection Profile When adding a Connection Profile in the Add Connection Profile screen the Superuser can toggle the Superuser Accessible Only option to Yes or No Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type PPP Encapsulation Options IP Profile Parameters Superuser Accessible Only No COMMIT CANCEL ieee Return Enter to accept the profile Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit This option is visible whether or not there are authorized username passwords other than the Superuser The Superuser can also change the user accessibility after creating a Connection Profile or a limited user in the Change Connection Profile screen Syste
290. tion technology equipment This standard covers a broad area of product design including RF emissions and immunity from electrical disturbances The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 complies with the following EU directives e Low Voltage 73 23 EEC e EMC Compatibility 89 336 EEC conforming to EN 55 022 Technical Specifications and Safety Information D 3 Manufacturer s Declaration of Conformance Note Warnings This is a Class B product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Adequate measures include increasing the physical distance between this product and other electrical devices Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment United States Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
291. tions 2 15 adding 2 17 deleting 2 20 modifying 2 20 once only 2 19 viewing 2 16 weekly 2 18 security filters 9 17 9 32 measures to increase 9 1 telnet 9 16 Security Policy Database SPD 5 2 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP community strings 8 12 MIBs supported 8 10 setup screen 8 11 traps 8 12 SNMP V2c 8 10 src port 9 21 SSID Wireless ID 2 30 Stateful inspection 2 23 static IP addresses B 8 static route rules of installation 6 9 static routes 6 3 6 6 strong encryption 4 18 subnet masks B 3 subnets B 2 B 5 multiple 6 4 nested B 11 subnets and subnet masks B 2 support technical A 3 T technical support A 3 telnet 1 3 access 9 16 terminal emulation software configuring 1 4 TFTP defined 10 6 downloading configuration files 10 7 updating firmware 10 7 uploading configuration files 10 8 TFTP transferring files 10 6 tiered access 9 2 TOS bit 2 21 9 33 Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP 10 6 Trivial File Transfer Protocol see TFTP troubleshooting A 1 configuration PC A 1 event histories 8 4 trusted host 9 31 trusted subnet 9 31 tunnel options ATMP 4 15 PPTP 4 4 tunneling 4 2 U Unspecified Bit Rate UBR 2 6 updating firmware with TFTP 10 7 updating Netopia s firmware 10 7 Index 5 upgrade 1 3 uploading configuration files 10 8 with TFTP 10 8 utilities and diagnostics 10 1 V Variable Bit Rate VBR 2 6 viewing scheduled connections 2 16 Virtual Private Networks VPN 4 1 VPN
292. tions beyond Easy Setup Selecting this option displays the Change Access Password screen Change Access Password New Password CHANGE PASSWORD NOW CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes When changing a password you will be challenged to enter it again to be sure you have entered it correctly User menu differences Menus reflect the security access level of the user Consequently configuration menus will display differing options based upon the parameters a particular user is allowed to change Some differences include e Limited users non Superusers do not have access to Easy Setup 9 10 Firmware User Guide e All users have access to System Configuration Quick Menus and Quick View but limited users have only limited access to configuration elements in their descendant menus e Configuration screen elements to which configuration access is forbidden are usually hidden The Quick Menus screen reflects the security access level of the user Menus to which configuration access is forbidden are hidden Main Menu The following is an example comparison of the Main Menu as seen by the Superuser and by a Limited user Superuser Limited user Netopia Router Netopia Router Easy Setup WAN Configuration System Configuration System Configuration Utilities amp Diagnostics Utilities amp Diagnostics Statistics amp Logs Statistics amp Logs
293. to Reading Config The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Uploading configuration files Using TFTP you can send a file containing a snapshot of the gateway s current configuration to a TFTP server The file can then be downloaded by a different Router unit to configure its parameters See Downloading configuration files on page 10 7 This is useful for configuring a number of gateways with identical parameters or just for creating configuration backup files Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Router unit by Netopia or your network administrator To upload a configuration file follow these steps 1 Select TFTP Server Name and enter the server name or IP address of the TFTP server you will use The server name or IP address is available from the site where the server is located 2 Select Config File Name and enter a name for the file you will upload The file will appear with the name you choose on the TFTP server You may need to enter a file path along with the file name for example Mypc Netopia myfile 3 Select SEND CONFIG TO SERVER and press Return Netopia will begin to transfer the file The TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Writing Config The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of bytes transferred Restarting the System You can restart the syst
294. tomatically create NAT port maps This means that applications that support UPnP and are used with a UPnP enabled Netopia Gateway will not need application layer gateway support on the Netopia Gateway to work through NAT You can disable UPnP if you are not using any UPnP devices or applications You must reboot the Netopia device for this setting to take effect Superuser configuration The access privileges of the Superuser account are not modifiable It is possible however to control who can log in as Superuser Select Superuser Configuration and press Return The Superuser Configuration screen appears Superuser Configuration Name 19 characters max admin Password Telnet Access Enabled Web Access Enabled ADD SUPERUSER e Assign a Superuser Name It can be up to 19 characters long It is good practice not to use any easily guessed combination such as your birthday e Assign a Password Keep this password secure If you lose or forget it you will not be able to access the gateway without factory defaulting it thereby losing all of your configuration information e You can disable Telnet or Web Access This may be useful for extra security in preventing remote attempts to access the gateway Select ADD SUPERUSER and press Return The Superuser account is now configured You will be challenged for this name and password every time you attempt to log into the gateway 9 4 Firmware User Guide Limited user c
295. tory Defaults Superuser Send ICMP Echo Requests to a network host Statistics amp Logs menu The Statistics amp Logs menu shown below is a composite of all the possible options on all Netopia gateways supported by the firmware Substantial differences exist among screens on a given gateway Here all selection options are shown Based on access level the Statistics amp Logs menu displays its options according to the following diagram Global p gt WAN Event History Global Device Event History Global p gt IP Routing Table Global BServed IP Addresses Global Served IP Addresses Global Backup Management Statistics Global General Statistics Global System Information Quick Menus Security 9 15 Quick Menus vary considerably between models features and access levels The following is an example comparison of the Quick Menu as seen by the Superuser and by a Limited user Superuser Quick Menu Connection Profiles Line Configuration IP Setup Add Connection Profiles Fr Relay Config IP Address Serving Setup Change Connection Profiles Fr Relay DLCI Config IP Filter Sets Delete Connection Profiles Backup Config Static Routes WAN Default Profile Telephone Setup Network Address Translation ATMP PPTP Default Profile IKE Phase 1 Config Scheduled Connections Add Scheduled Connection Change Scheduled Connection MacIP Setup Delete Scheduled Connection TFTP C
296. tring to the empty string will not block Get Requests or Get Next Requests since those operations and Set Requests are still allowed using the non empty Read Write community string Even if you decide not to use SNMP you should change the community strings This prevents unauthorized access to the Router through SNMP For more information on security issues see Suggested Security Measures on page 9 1 SNMP traps An SNMP trap is an informational message sent from an SNMP agent in this case the Router to a manager When a manager receives a trap it may log the trap as well as generate an alert message of its own Standard traps generated by the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 include the following e An authentication failure trap is generated when the gateway detects an incorrect community string in a received SNMP packet Authentication Traps Enable must be On for this trap to be generated A cold start trap is generated after the gateway is reset An interface down trap ifDown is generated when one of the gateway s interfaces such as a port stops functioning or is disabled e An interface up trap ifUp is generated when one of the gateway s interfaces such as a port begins functioning The Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 sends traps using UDP for IP networks You can specify which SNMP managers are sent the IP traps generated by the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 Up to eight receivers can be set You can al
297. ture firmware releases The Shared Secret field allows you to enter a shared secret phrase between 1 and 48 characters long that will be used to generate key material for IKE Phase 1 The Encryption Algorithm pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 encryption algorithm and may be either DES the default or 3DES The Hash Algorithm pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 hash algorithm and may be either SHA1 the default or MD5 The Diffie Hellman Group pop up menu specifies the IKE Phase 1 Diffie Hellman key exchange size and may be either Group 1 768 bits Group 2 1024 bits the default or Group 5 1536 bits If you select Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options the Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options screen appears 5 6 Firmware User Guide Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options Negotiation Normal SA Use Policy Newest SAs Immediately Allow Dangling Phase 2 SAs Yes Phase 1 SA Lifetime seconds 28800 Send Initial Contact Message Yes Include Vendor ID Payload Yes Independent Phase 2 Re keys Yes Strict Port Policy No Return Enter accepts Tab toggles ESC cancels Normally it is not necessary to change the settings of the items on the Advanced IKE Phase 1 Options screen Most of these settings exist for ensuring compatibility with remote IKE implementations that may have certain limitations The Negotiation pop up menu allows you to specify the way the device will respond to a connection attempt Normal the default is a two w
298. ty 9 25 Adding a filter set You can create up to eight different custom filter sets Each filter set can contain up to 16 output filters and up to 16 input filters To add a new filter set select Add Filter Set in the Filter Sets screen and press Return The Add Filter Set screen appears Add Filter Set Filter Set Name Filter Set 3 ADD FILTER SET Naming a new filter set All new filter sets have a default name The first filter set you add will be called Filter Set 1 the next filter will be Filter Set 2 and so on To give a new filter set a different name select Filter Set Name and enter a new name for the filter set To save the filter set select ADD FILTER SET The saved filter set is empty contains no filters but you can return to it later to add filters see Adding filters to a filter set on page 9 26 9 26 Firmware User Guide Adding filters to a filter set There are two kinds of filters you can add to a filter set input and output Input filters check packets received from the Internet destined for your network Output filters check packets transmitted from your network to the Internet packet 7 input filter WAN LAN packet output filter The Netopia Router Packets in the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 pass through an input filter if they originate in the WAN and through an output filter if they re being sent out to the WAN The process for adding input and
299. ublic Range Select Use NAT Public Range and from the pop up menu choose Static Range Select ADD NAT MAP and press Return This will statically map the first five public IP addresses to the first five corresponding private IP addresses and will map 206 1 1 6 to the remaining private IP addresses using PAT Notes on the example The Easy Map List and the Easy PAT List are attached to any new Connection Profile by default If you want to use this NAT configuration on a previously defined Connection Profile then you need to bind the Map List to the profile You do this through either the NAT Associations screen or the profile s configuration screens The PAT part of this example setup will allow any user on the Netopia Router s LAN with an IP address in the range of 192 168 1 6 through 192 168 1 254 to initiate traffic flow to the outside world for example the Internet No one on the Internet would be able to initiate a conversation with them The Static mapping part of this example will allow any of the machines in the range of addresses from 192 168 1 1 through 192 168 1 5 to communicate with the outside world as if they were at the addresses 206 1 1 1 through 206 1 1 5 respectively It also allows any machine on the Internet to access any service port on any of these five machines You may decide this poses a security risk You may decide that anyone can have complete access to your FTP server but not to your Router and only limit
300. ultiple VCs defined it binds to the Default Profile f you add a second VC it is initialized to the Default Profile and the menu screens display the VC Connection Profile related items allowing you to bind to a specific Connection Profile instead of the Default Profile In addition the router statically binds the first VC according to the rules used to select a profile for dynamic binding At this point each profile uses static binding when the link is brought up if there are no VCs when you add a VC for example if you deleted all your previous VCs and started adding them again dynamic binding will occur when the link comes up If you delete a VC leaving only one VC that VC resumes dynamically binding again e Select ADD Circuit NOW and press Return 8 To display or change a circuit select Display Change Circuit select a circuit from the pop up menu and press Return The fields are the same as those in the Add Circuit screen 9 To delete a circuit select Delete Circuit select a circuit from the pop up menu and press Return In the confirmation window select CONTINUE and press Return 10 Press Escape to return to the WAN Setup menu WAN and System Configuration 2 9 Creating a New Connection Profile Connection profiles are useful for configuring the connection and authentication settings for negotiating a PPP connection If you are using the PPP data link encapsulation method you can store your authentication inf
301. uration screen on page 7 10 7 2 Firmware User Guide the Backup IP Gateway menu item in the IP Setup screen under the System Configuration menu Here you enter a Backup Gateway IP address See IP Setup on page 7 7 Alternatively you can choose a different backup gateway device see Backup Default Gateway on page 7 14 Detailed descriptions follow Connection Profiles The dial backup feature allows you to configure a complete Connection Profile for the modem backup just as you do for your primary WAN connection In this way profiles are associated with a particular interface It should have switched characteristics for modem backup Navigate to the Add Connection Profile screen Main WAN Add Connection Menu Configuration Profile Add Connection Profile Profile Name Profile 1 Profile Enabled Yes Encapsulation Type RFC1483 RFC1483 Mode Bridged 1483 IP Profile Parameters COMMIT CANCEL Return accepts ESC cancels Left Right moves insertion point Del deletes Configure a new Conn Profile Finished COMMIT or CANCEL to exit If you used Easy Setup to configure your DSL connection you have already created one Connection Profile For the backup modem you create a second Connection Profile and associate it with the backup modem interface Profile Name Give the profile a descriptive name for example Modem Backup Profile Enabled Ordinarily this is toggled t
302. urce IP Address Source IP Address Mask Dest IP Address Ne TOS i TOS Mask PrOtTOCO ype ADD THIS FILTER NOW Return Enter to add this Filter to the Filter Set Enter the packet specific information for this filter Note Default Forwarding Filter If you create one or more filters that have a matching action of forward then action on a packet matching none of the filters is to block any traffic Therefore if the behavior you want is to force the routing of a certain type of packet and pass all others through the normal routing mechanism you must configure one filter to match the first type of packet and apply Force Routing A subsequent filter is required to match and forward all other packets Management IP traffic If the Force Routing filter is applied to source IP addresses it may inadvertently block communication with the router itself You can avoid this by preceding the Force Routing filter with a filter that matches the destination IP address of the router itself Security 9 35 Firewall Tutorial General firewall terms Filter rule A filter set is comprised of individual filter rules Filter set A grouping of individual filter rules Firewall A component or set of components that restrict access between a protected network and the Internet or between two networks Host A workstation on the network Packet Unit of communication on the Internet Packet filter Packet filters allow or deny packets based
303. ut should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 Important Safety Instructions Australian Safety Information The following safety information is provided in conformance with Australian safety requirements Caution DO NOT USE BEFORE READING THE INSTRUCTIONS Do not connect the Ethernet ports to a carrier or carriage service provider s telecommunications network or facility unless a you have the written consent of the network or facility manager or b the connection is in accordance with a connection permit or connection rules Connection of the Ethernet ports may cause a hazard or damage to the telecommunication network or facility or persons with consequential liability for substantial compensation Caution Depending on the power supply provided with the product either the direct plug in power supply blades power supply cord plug or the appliance coupler serves as the mains power disconnect It is important that the direct plug in power supply socket outlet or appliance coupler be located so it is readily accessible CAUT
304. v2 multicast selected the Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 will generate RIP packets only to other routers capable of recognizing RIP v2 packets ADSL Line Configuration screen The ADSL Line Configuration screen is shown below ADSL Line Configuration Circuit Type Multimode Trellis Coding Enabled On Signaling Mode FDM Fast Retrain Enabled On Wiring Type AutoSense Data Link Encapsulation RFC1483 1 Select Circuit Type and from the pop up menu choose the type of circuit to which you will be connecting Multimode T1 413 G dmt or G lite Select Trellis Coding Enabled Toggle it to On the default or Off Select Signaling Mode and choose Echo Cancellation or FDM the default If you selected Multimode Circuit Type the Fast Retrain Enabled field appears Toggle it to On the default or Off 5 The Wiring Type pop up menu allows you to choose the type of copper pair wiring in use at your location Usually the default AutoSense will detect the type and adjust itself accordingly If you want to set it yourself and you know the type of wiring you have choose either Tip Ring Inner Pair or A A1 Outer Pair from the pop up menu 6 Select Data Link Encapsulation and press Return The pop up menu will offer you the choice of PPP or RFC1483 ATM Circuit Configuration On ADSL WAN interfaces the Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM connection between the router and the central office equipment DSLAM is divided logic
305. values between O and 2432 1 The default value is 28 800 seconds The value zero specifies the default Send Initial Contact Message toggles whether or not the IKE negotiation process begins by sending an initial contact message The default is Yes Internet Key Exchange IKE IPsec Key Management for VPNs 5 7 e Include Vendor ID Payload toggles whether or not the Router includes the vendor ID payload in its IKE Phase 1 messages Independent Phase 2 Re keys toggles whether or not a Phase 2 re keys requires a Phase 1 re key If this item is set to Yes the default Phase 2 re keys will be performed independently when necessary without requiring a Phase 1 re key If this item is set to No each Phase 2 re key will be preceded by a Phase 1 re key This item should normally be set to Yes unless the device is communicating with a non compliant remote IPsec peer that requires that a Phase 1 re key precede each Phase 2 re key Strict Port Policy toggles whether or not IKE requires packets to originate from the IANA IKE port 500 Set to Yes the Router will listen only to port 500 and source its packets from port 500 Set to No the Router will return traffic to whatever port originated it Changing an IKE Phase 1 Profile Selecting Display Change IKE Phase 1 Profile or Delete IKE Phase 1 Profile displays an IKE Phase 1 profile pop up menu listing the names of all currently defined IKE Phase 1 profiles IPsec Configuration IKE Phasel Profil
306. vecssiecesdasendeseueueomnesenecesieusavee 3 6 Easy Setup Profile configuration s csscsscsseees 3 6 Server Lists and Dynamic NAT configuration 3 7 IP SOUP ie ciaees et acute aacdota a eraai 3 7 Modifying Map SES ccc csieesaueseneundensceneveseraddveadeuane 3 12 Adding Server LIStS witsdecissscccceceiat diiron aaa i 3 15 Modifying server StS ie iscvscecssecsnvehdicnndtnedesaentccuss 3 17 Deleting a SERVER scscciccsicenrensnic ad eticasnednaisecedionde 3 19 Binding Map Lists and Server Lists ccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 21 IP profile DArAMEtelS cccccccececceceeceseeeeeeeeeees 3 21 IP Parameters WAN Default Profile 3 23 NAT ASSOGIOLIONS xccictsacacats setiaceedede ieeeeeiaciewenita de idsicendd 3 25 IP PASSUINOUBM ccacssessesancncceasasuscciniatvemeensacesccacciaeautseenes 3 27 MultiNAT Configuration Example ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 31 Chapter 4 Virtual Private Networks VPNS 0ccssseseeeeeeeeees 4 1 OVERIG W ccotastacatotutatncenincsacanesa ath ancatee Seetettutaancmeanssatheees 4 1 About PPIP TWIGS cosccisosscusecscagesarstereenciisexdecise nei 4 4 PPIP CONMNEUra UO Mcse oaa 4 4 About IPSEC TUNNE Si cesccovrsussactsaeuccaseessorisarcastanersarreaeees 4 7 ADOUU LOT TINNEIS sieren aa diate sedeeatace anni athesed 4 8 LE2TP CONN AU OM ss secesardesasarcnperasanestenanteategesendads 4 8 ADOUEXGRE TUNDES siaine tera e a 4 11 VENHO al liesas R 4 14 About ATMP TUnNelS
307. vidual user inadvertently damaging the WAN connection Exercise caution in assigning privileges other than these defaults to limited users WAN Data Configuration No Connection Profile Configuration No Circuit PVC DLCI Configuration No LAN Data Configuration Yes LAN Subnet Configuration Yes NAT Filters Configuration Yes Preferences Global Configuration Yes 9 6 Firmware User Guide Advanced Security Options The Advanced Security Options screen allows you to configure the global access privileges of users authenticated via a RADIUS server or a TACACS server From the Security Options screen select Advanced Security Options The Advanced Security Options screen appears RADIUS server authentication Advanced Security Options Remote Authentication RADIUS Security Databases Local only Remote Server Addr Name Remote Server Secret Alt Remote Server Addr Name Alt Remote Server Secret RADIUS Identifier RADIUS Server Authentication Port Remote Access Privileges Telnet Server Port Device Web Server via LAN only Custom LAN Ethernet IP Filter Set Remove Filter Set Select RADIUS Access Privileges and from the pull down menu choose which access privilege you want this user to have All LAN WAN or Custom If you assign any of these privileges limited users will have full access to privileges associated with these interfaces You can customize these privileg
308. whether the static route should be installed in the IP routing table To return to the Static Routes screen press Escape Adding a static route To add a new static route select Add Static Route in the Static Routes screen The Add Static Route screen will appear Add Static Route Static Route Enabled Yes Destination Network IP Address 0 0 0 0 Destination Network Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Next Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Route Priority High Advertise Route Via RIP No ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW Configure a new Static Route in this Screen e To install the static route in the IP routing table select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to Yes To remove the static route from the IP routing table select Static Route Enabled and toggle it to No e Be sure to read the rules on the installation of static routes in the IP routing table See Rules of static route installation on page 6 9 Select Destination Network IP Address and enter the network IP address of the destination network e Select Destination Network Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask used by the destination network Select Next Gateway IP Address and enter the IP address for the gateway that the Router will use to reach the destination network This gateway does not necessarily have to be part of the destination network but it must at least know where to forward packets destined for that network e Select Route Priority and choose High or Low High means
309. why the term nested is appropriate for describing these subnets 1 Address range available to a b c 0 less the two nested subnets 129 valid addresses used by a b c 128 _ L_ 190 valid addresses used 249 by a b c 248 _ L 254 Broadcasts As mentioned earlier binary IP host or subnet addresses composed entirely of ones or zeros are reserved for broadcasting A broadcast packet is a packet that is to be delivered to every host on the network if both the host address and the subnet address are all ones or all zeros or to every host on the subnetwork if the host address is all ones or all zeros but the subnet address is a combination or zeros and ones Instead of making many copies of the packet individually addressed to different hosts all the host machines know to pay attention to broadcast packets as well as to packets addressed to their specific individual host addresses Depending on the age and type of IP equipment you use broadcasts will be addressed using either all zeros or all ones but not both If your network requires zeros broadcasting you must configure this through SNMP Packet header types As previously mentioned IP works with other protocols to allow communication over IP networks When IP is used on an Ethernet network IP works with the Ethernet or 802 3 framing standards among other protocols These two protocols specify two different ways to organize the very first signals in the sequence of elect
310. ws 95 and comes standard with Windows 98 and Windows NT The VPN tunnel behaves as a private network connection unrelated to other traffic on the network Once you have installed Dial Up Networking you will be able to connect to your remote site as if you had a direct private connection regardless of the intervening network s through which your data passes You may need to install the Dial Up Networking feature of Windows 95 98 or 2000 to take advantage of the virtual private networking feature of your Netopia Router Note For the latest information and tech notes on Dial Up Networking and VPNs be sure to visit the Netopia website at http www netopia com and for the latest software and release notes the Microsoft website at http www microsoft com Installing Dial Up Networking Check to see if Dial Up Networking is already installed on your PC Open your My Computer or whatever you have named it icon on your desktop If there is a folder named Dial Up Networking you don t have to install it If there is no such folder you must install it from your system disks or CDROM Do the following 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel window double click the Add Remove Programs icon The Add Remove Programs Properties window appears Click the Windows Setup tab Double click Communications 4 22 Firmware User Guide The Communications window appears Communications x To add or r
311. ws the data link encapsulation method PPTP or ATMP Rx Pckts Shows the number of packets received via the VPN tunnel Tx Pckts Shows the number of packets transmitted via the VPN tunnel Rx Discard Shows the number of packets discarded Remote Address Shows the tunnel partner s IP address Virtual Private Networks VPNs 4 21 Dial Up Networking for VPN Microsoft Windows Dial Up Networking software permits a remote standalone workstation to establish a VPN tunnel to a PPTP server such as a Netopia Router located at a central site Dial Up Networking also allows a mobile user who may not be connected to a PAC to dial into an intermediate ISP and establish a VPN tunnel to for example a corporate headquarters remotely Netopia Routers also can serve as a PAC at the workstation s site making it unnecessary for the standalone workstation to initiate the tunnel In such a case the Dial Up Networking software is not required since the Netopia Router initiates the tunnel This section is provided for users who may require the VPN client software for Dial Up Networking in order to connect to an ISP who provides a PPTP account Microsoft Windows Dial Up Networking DUN is the means by which you can initiate a VPN tunnel between your individual remote client workstation and a private network such as your corporate LAN via the Internet DUN is a software adapter that allows you to establish a tunnel DUN is a free add on available for Windo
312. xt few sections to learn more about how these powerful security tools work What s a filter and what s a filter set A filter is a rule that lets you specify what sort of data can flow in and out of your network A particular filter can be either an input filter one that is used on data packets coming in to your network from the Internet or an output filter one that is used on data packets going out from your network to the Internet A filter set is a group of filters that work together to check incoming or outgoing data A filter set can consist of a combination of input and output filters How filter sets work A filter set acts like a team of customs inspectors Each filter is an inspector through which incoming and outgoing packages must pass The inspectors work as a team but each inspects every package individually Each inspector has a specific task One inspector s task may be to examine the destination address of all outgoing packages That inspector looks for a certain destination which could be as specific as a street address or as broad as an entire country and checks each package s destination address to see if it matches that destination A filter inspects data packets like a customs inspector scrutinizing packages 9 18 Firmware User Guide Filter priority Continuing the customs inspectors analogy imagine the inspectors lined up to examine a package If the pa
313. y NetWare clients that allow workstations to run applications that support IBM s NetBIOS calls Select DHCP NetBIOS Options and press Return The DHCP NetBIOS Options screen appears 6 22 Firmware User Guide DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve NetBIOS Type Yes NetBIOS Type Type B Serve NetBIOS Scope No NetBIOS Scope Serve NetBIOS Name Server No NetBIOS Name Server IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Configure DHCP served NetBIOS options To serve DHCP clients with the type of NetBIOS used on your network select Serve NetBIOS Type and toggle it to Yes From the NetBIOS Type pop up menu select the type of NetBIOS used on your network DHCP NetBIOS Options Serve NetBIOS Type NetBIOS Type Serve NetBIOS Scope NetBIOS Scope Serve NetBIOS Name Server NetBIOS Name Server IP Addr Local network Broadcast nodes To serve DHCP clients with the NetBIOS scope select Serve NetBIOS Scope and toggle it to Yes Select NetBIOS Scope and enter the scope To serve DHCP clients with the IP address of a NetBIOS name server select Serve NetBIOS Name Server and toggle it to Yes IP Setup 6 23 Select NetBIOS Name Server IP Addr and enter the IP address for the NetBIOS name server You are now finished setting up DHCP NetBIOS Options To return to the IP Address Serving screen press Escape To enable BootP s address serving capability select Serve BOOTP Clients and toggle to Yes Note Addresses assigned through BootP are
314. you to have a standard configuration that uses for example four VCs 0 35 0 38 8 35 8 38 pointing to the same profile The unit will now automatically select the active VC on networks with a VPI VCI of any of these four values without any custom configuration of the unit You must however manually create these VCs and associate them with the profile you desire You configure Virtual Circuits in the Add Change Circuit screen Main WAN ATM Circuits Menu i Configuration Configuration ATM Circuits Configuration Show Change Circuit Add Circuit Delete Circuit 7 To add a circuit select Add Circuit and press Return The Add Circuit screen appears 2 6 Firmware User Guide Add Circuit Circuit Name Circuit 2 Circuit Enabled Circuit VPI 0 255 Circuit VCI 32 65535 QoS Peak Cell Rate 0 line rate Use Connection Profile Default Profile Use Default Profile for Circuit ADD Circuit NOW CANCEL e Enter a name for the circuit in the Circuit Name field e Toggle Circuit Enabled to Yes e Enter the Virtual Path Identifier and the Virtual Channel Identifier in the Circuit VPI and Circuit VCI fields respectively The Peak Cell Rate field is editable Netopia Firmware Version 8 4 supports three ATM classes of ser vice for data connections Unspecified Bit Rate UBR Constant Bit Rate CBR and Variable Bit Rate VBR You can configure these classes of service on

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

延長ケーブル HEM-0P40A  CLID - Adaptech  KV-XF25M81_SERVICE MANUAL - Diagramasde.com    Industrial Chart Recorder Communication Interface User's Manual    Network Time Server NTS–200–GPS User`s Manual  Targus Wireless Mouse for Mac    Chapter 2 Mainboard Installation  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file